Garmin | G1000: Columbia 350 | Garmin G1000: Columbia 350 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400

Garmin G1000: Columbia 350 G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
Columbia
350/400
Copyright © 2006 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 530.01 or later for the Columbia 400 and 530.02 or later for the Columbia 350.
Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Unit 5, The Quadrangle, Abbey Park Industrial Estate, Romsey, Hampshire S051 9DL, U.K
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000® is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications; Ryan® is a registered
trademark of Avidyne Corporation, and XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
March 2006
Printed in the U.S.A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin Web site at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function.
The G1000 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use
in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party
sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in the Columbia 350/400, has a very high degree of functional
integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all
conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation
to occur without a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect
such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the
cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: The Jeppesen database used in the G1000 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure
that its information remains current. Updates are released every 28 days. A database information packet is
included in the G1000 package. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: The basemap (land and water data) must not be used for navigation, but rather only for non-
navigational situational awareness. Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation
sources.
CAUTION: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
G1000 Pilot’s Guide documentation. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight
operations, carefully compare indications from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including
the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any
discrepancies before continuing navigation.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
CAUTION: The GDU 1040 PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that
is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM
THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: There are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms that can cause
isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge points in
the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has been
cleared. Avoid the clusters to avoid the thunderstorms. In the cell display mode, even a single discharge
point may represent thunderstorm activity and should therefore be avoided.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
iii
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00552-00
iv
Revision
A
Date
3/29/06
Page Range
i - I-4
Initial release
Description
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description ..............................................1-1
Line Replaceable Units ........................................1-2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards ....................................1-7
System Power-up ..................................................1-8
System Operation.................................................1-9
Normal Display Operation ..........................................1-9
Reversionary Display Operation ................................1-10
AHRS Operation ......................................................1-11
G1000 System Annunciations ...................................1-12
G1000 Controls...................................................1-13
PFD/MFD Controls ...................................................1-13
MFD/PFD Control Unit ..............................................1-15
Softkey Function ......................................................1-17
Accessing G1000 Functionality ........................1-21
Menus ....................................................................1-21
Data Entry ..............................................................1-21
Page Groups ...........................................................1-22
System Setup and Status ..........................................1-26
Electronic Checklists (Optional) .................................1-35
Display Backlighting ..........................................1-37
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Introduction ..........................................................2-1
Flight Instruments ................................................2-4
Airspeed Indicator .....................................................2-4
Attitude Indicator ......................................................2-6
Altimeter ..................................................................2-7
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator ........................2-9
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) ......................................2-9
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) ...........................2-10
Supplemental Flight Data .................................2-17
Outside Air Temperature ...........................................2-17
System Time ............................................................2-18
Timer/References Window ........................................2-19
PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions .....2-20
Alerts Window.........................................................2-20
Annunciation Window ..............................................2-21
Softkey Annunciations ..............................................2-21
Traffic Annunciation .................................................2-22
TAWS Annunciations ................................................2-22
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Marker Beacon Annunciations ..................................2-23
Altitude Alerting ......................................................2-23
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude.......................2-24
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS Display.............................................................3-2
3.2 Engine Page ..........................................................3-4
Carbon Monoxide Detection .......................................3-6
Fuel Calculations Group .............................................3-6
Engine Temperature Group .........................................3-7
3.3 Engine Leaning Assist Mode ...............................3-8
Columbia 350 ...........................................................3-8
Columbia 400 .........................................................3-10
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Audio Panel Description ......................................4-1
Transceivers ..............................................................4-2
Mono/Stereo Headsets ...............................................4-2
Unmuted/Unswitched Inputs ......................................4-2
Audio Panel Controls .................................................4-2
4.2 Audio Panel Operation ........................................4-4
Power-up and Fail-safe Operation ...............................4-4
Key Annunciators .......................................................4-4
Key Backlighting ........................................................4-4
Transceiver Keys ........................................................4-5
Secondary COM Muting on Receive and Transmit .........4-6
Split COM Function ....................................................4-6
PA Function ..............................................................4-6
Speaker ....................................................................4-7
Marker Beacon Receiver .............................................4-7
Navigation Radios .....................................................4-8
Intercom System (ICS) ................................................4-9
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) ..............................4-10
Intercom Volume and Squelch ...................................4-10
Entertainment Inputs ...............................................4-11
Data Link Receiver XM Radio System.........................4-12
Clearance Recorder and Playback..............................4-12
Reversionary Mode ..................................................4-12
4.3 NAV/COM Description ........................................4-13
Boxes and Fields ......................................................4-14
Radio Selection .......................................................4-14
Controls..................................................................4-15
Tuning Box ..............................................................4-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Frequency Transfer Arrow .........................................4-16
Switching Between Radios .......................................4-17
Radio Indicators ......................................................4-17
Volume ...................................................................4-18
Manual Frequency Tuning .........................................4-18
4.4 COM Operation ...................................................4-20
Frequency Spacing ...................................................4-20
Automatic Squelch...................................................4-21
Selecting a COM Radio ............................................4-21
Emergency Frequency (121.500 MHz) ........................4-22
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz .................4-22
Stuck Microphone....................................................4-22
4.5 NAV Operation ....................................................4-23
Frequency Range .....................................................4-23
Morse Code Identifier ..............................................4-23
NAV Radio Selection for Navigation ..........................4-24
4.6 Auto-tuning .........................................................4-25
Auto-tuning on the PFD ...........................................4-26
Auto-tuning on the MFD ..........................................4-26
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation 4-33
4.7 GTX 33 Mode S Transponder .............................4-35
Transponder Softkeys ...............................................4-35
Transponder Data Box ..............................................4-36
Mode S Features ......................................................4-36
Traffic Information Service (TIS).................................4-37
4.8 Transponder Operation ......................................4-38
Mode Selection .......................................................4-38
Code Selection ........................................................4-39
IDENT Function .......................................................4-40
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
vi
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
Introduction ..........................................................5-1
Direct-to-Navigation (MFD) ...............................5-2
Direct-to-Navigation (PFD) ................................5-8
Operations ................................................................5-8
Flight Plans (MFD) .............................................5-10
Flight Plan Catalog Page ..........................................5-10
Active Flight Plan Page.............................................5-16
Flight Plans (PFD) ..............................................5-32
Operations ..............................................................5-32
Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (MFD) ..5-39
Operations ..............................................................5-39
5.7 Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (PFD) ...5-43
Operations ..............................................................5-43
5.8 Waypoint Page Group (MFD) ............................5-47
WPT – Airport Information........................................5-48
WPT – Departure Information ...................................5-55
WPT – Arrival Information ........................................5-59
WPT – Approach Information ....................................5-63
WPT – Weather Information .....................................5-67
WPT - Intersection Information .................................5-69
WPT - NDB Information ............................................5-71
WPT - VOR Information ............................................5-73
WPT - User Waypoint Information .............................5-75
5.9 NRST Page Group ...............................................5-79
NRST - Nearest Airports............................................5-79
NRST - Nearest Intersections.....................................5-83
NRST - Nearest NDB ................................................5-84
NRST - Nearest VOR .................................................5-85
NRST - Nearest User Waypoint ..................................5-87
NRST - Nearest Frequencies ......................................5-89
NRST - Nearest Airspaces .........................................5-92
5.10 Nearest Airports (PFD) .......................................5-95
Operations ..............................................................5-95
5.11 Auxiliary Page Group (MFD)..............................5-97
AUX - Trip Planning ..................................................5-97
AUX - Utility .........................................................5-101
AUX - GPS Status...................................................5-104
AUX - System Setup ...............................................5-107
AUX - XM Information (Optional) ............................5-108
AUX - System Status ..............................................5-109
5.12 Vertical Navigation (MFD) ...............................5-110
Operations ............................................................5-110
5.13 Navigation Map Configuration (MFD) ...........5-113
Navigation Map Page.............................................5-113
5.14 PFD Inset Map and PFD Windows ..................5-140
Inset Map .............................................................5-140
PFD Windows ........................................................5-141
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 Weather Avoidance ..............................................6-2
Stormscope® (Optional, Columbia 350 only) ...............6-2
XM Weather (Optional) ..............................................6-9
6.2 Traffic Avoidance ................................................6-25
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Traffic Annunciation .................................................6-26
Traffic on the Navigation Map Page ...........................6-27
Traffic Information Service (TIS).................................6-29
Ryan 9900BX Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional).6-33
6.3 Terrain Avoidance ...............................................6-35
Topographic Data on the Navigation Map Page ..........6-35
Terrain and Obstacle Proximity..................................6-36
Terrain Data on the Navigation Map Page ..................6-38
Terrain and Obstacle Proximity Limitations .................6-41
Terrain Awareness & Warning System (TAWS) Class B
(Optional) ...............................................................6-42
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts ..............................................A-1
SD Card Use ....................................................................B-1
Glossary...........................................................................C-1
Frequently Asked Questions .........................................D-1
G1000 Map Datums ....................................................... E-1
General TIS Information ................................................ F-1
Map Symbols ................................................................. G-1
INDEX
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 Introduction ..........................................................7-1
AFCS Overview..........................................................7-1
AFCS Controls ...........................................................7-2
7.2 Flight Director Operation ....................................7-4
Activating the Flight Director ......................................7-4
AFCS Status Box ........................................................7-4
Command Bars..........................................................7-5
Flight Director Limitations ..........................................7-5
7.3 Flight Director Modes ..........................................7-6
Pitch Modes ..............................................................7-7
Roll Modes..............................................................7-14
7.4 Autopilot Operation...........................................7-19
Flight Control ..........................................................7-19
Engaging the Autopilot ............................................7-20
Control Wheel Steering ............................................7-20
Disengaging the Autopilot ........................................7-21
7.5 Example Procedures...........................................7-22
ILS Approach ...........................................................7-27
Go Around/Missed Approach ....................................7-28
7.6 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts ........................7-30
AFCS Status Alerts ...................................................7-30
Overspeed Protection ...............................................7-31
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 GDL 69A Data Link Receiver – XM Digital Audio
Entertainment (Optional) ....................................8-1
XM Information Page .................................................8-2
XM Radio Page..........................................................8-3
Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting .............................8-6
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BLANK PAGE
viii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
This section is designed to provide an overview of the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck as installed in Columbia
350/400 aircraft. The G1000 is an integrated flight deck system that presents flight instrumentation, position,
navigation, communication, and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system
is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GDU 1042 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GCU 476 MFD/PFD Control Unit
• GDL 69A Data Link Receiver
• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos
• GDC 74 Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2.
The Columbia 350/400 is also equipped with a GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS), providing
the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of the G1000 System.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
• GDU 1040/1042 (2) – The GDU 1040 is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the GDU 1042 as
a Multi Function Display (MFD). Both displays feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution.
The displays communicate with each other through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each
display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of
display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and communicates
with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
• GCU 476 – The Control Unit provides MFD/PFD and radio tuning control through an RS-232 digital interface
1-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GIA 63 (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each IAU contains VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers and system integration microprocessors and
is paired with the on-side display via a HSDB connection. The IAUs are not paired together and do not
communicate with each other directly.
• GDC 74 – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature
(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the
G1000 System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GTX 33 – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both IAUs
through an RS-232 digital interface.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GRS 77 (2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation
is discussed in Section 1.5, System Operation.
• GMU 44 – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.
• GDL 69A – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to the G1000 MFD
and PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the
MFD via a HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable the GDL 69A
capability.
• GSA 81, GTA 82, and GSM 85 – The GSA 81 servos are used for automatic control of pitch and roll. The GTA
82 Pitch Trim Adapter works with the existing motor to provide automatic pitch trim. These units interface
with each IAU.
The GSM 85 servo mounts are responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuators to
the mechanical flight-control surface linkages.
1-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
������������������������������
��������
�����������
��������������
��������������
������������
�������
������������
�������
�������
������������
������
��������
��������
���
��������
��������
��������������
������������
������������������������
����������������������������
��������������
�������
�����������
���
����������
������������
������������������������
�����������������������������
��������������
�������
�����������
���
����������
������
����
��������
������������
���������
����������
����������
������
������������
�������
������
�����������
������
���������������
����
������
�����������
����������������������
������
����������
�������
����������������������
������
����������
����������������������
Figure 1-1 Basic G1000 System Block Diagram
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
������������������������������
�������������
������������������������
�����������������������������
��������������
�������
�����������
���
����������
��
����������
��������������������
����������������������
����������
�����������
������������������������
����������
�������
���������
���������������������
���������������������������
����������������������������
�����������
���������������
���������
Figure 1-2 G1000 With Optional/Additional Interfaces
NOTE: For information on additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the applicable optional interface
user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional
equipment.
1-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
SD Card Slots
Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The G1000 PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel, the MFD/PFD Control Unit, and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Terrain database name and version
• Land database name and version
• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
1-8
Figure 1-5 MFD Power-Up Splash Screen
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, it
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000
display operation, as well as the various AHRS modes and G1000 System Annunciations.
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information).
The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see the GPS Navigation
Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS; see the EIS
Section).
Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Operation
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: The G1000 System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A
for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
If the system fails to detect a display problem, reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing
the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP button (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for further details).
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
Pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP
button activates/deactivates
reversionary mode
Figure 1-8 DISPLAY BACKUP Button
1-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the G1000 System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information
from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives
appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
���������
���������
�����������
Magnetometer
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
���������
�����������
���������
Airspeed Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
�����������
���������
�����������
GPS
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
��
��
���
��
��
Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-9 AHRS Operation
GPS INPUT FAILURE
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS
information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and
heading information.
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Aircraft
Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-10 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
GIA 63
GIA 63
GRS 77 or GMU 44
GEA 71
or
GIA 63
GDC 74
GIA 63
GDC 74
1-12
GTX 33 or GIA 63
GIA 63
Figure 1-10 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 G1000 CONTROLS
The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, MFD/PFD
Control Unit, and Audio Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. Audio Panel
and AFCS (on the bezel of the MFD) controls are described in the Audio Panel and CNS and AFCS sections,
respectively. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM controls.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
11
14
12
15
16
18
17
Figure 1-11 PFD/MFD Controls
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
2
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
4
5
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Heading Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Joystick
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize
the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
7
COM Knob
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
8
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
10
Direct-to Key (
11
FPL Key
12
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
13
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
16
FMS Knob
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
System Knob)
location)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
17
Softkey Selection
Keys
18 ALT Knob
1-14
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
Large (Outer)
Knob
Small (Inner)
Knob
Figure 1-12 Dual Concentric Knob
MFD/PFD CONTROL UNIT
The MFD/PFD Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry, PFD/MFD
operation, and NAV/COM tuning. Many procedures in this Pilot’s Guide can be performed using the MFD/PFD
Control Unit rather than the display bezel controls. Indicators above the PFD, MFD, NAV, and COM keys are
illuminated when their respective control mode(s) are selected. The unit is in MFD control mode by default on
system power-up.
NAV/COM radio tuning can be accomplished in either PFD or MFD control mode. The appropriate frequency
box (refer to Figure 2-1) on the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a
few seconds to indicate Control Unit activity (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information
about NAV/COM tuning). Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation
of the previous radio tuning mode.
1
2
3
4
5
19
18
17
16
15
6
14
13
7
12
8
11
10
9
Figure 1-13 GCU 476 MFD/PFD Control Unit
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1
FPL Key
2
Direct-to Key (
3
MENU Key
4
PROC Key
5
Joystick
Displays flight plan information
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Turn to change map range
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
6 Alphanumeric Keys Allow data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers)
7
BKSP Key
Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered
8
SPC Key
Adds a space character
9
ENT Key
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry
10
CLR Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
SEL Key
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Arrows move light blue Softkey Selection Box (Figure 1-14) on selected display
11
Press the center to activate the selected softkey
12
Decimal Key
13
Plus-Minus (±) Key Toggles entry between the + and - characters
14
NAV Key
Selects/deselects NAV radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit
15
COM Key
Selects/deselects COM radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit
16
Frequency Transfer Transfers between active and standby selected COM or NAV tuning frequencies
Key
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
(EMERG)
automatically into the active frequency field
17
PFD Key
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access PFD functions
18
MFD Key
19
FMS/NAV-COM
Knob
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access MFD functions
(default display control mode)
NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob
1-16
Enters a decimal point character
PFD/MFD Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted by bullets.
Softkey
On
Softkey Selection
Box (Light Blue)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-14 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
The MFD/PFD Control Unit can also be used to select softkeys.
Selecting a softkey using the MFD/PFD Control Unit:
1) Choose the desired display control mode by pressing the PFD or MFD Key on the MFD/PFD Control Unit.
2) Move the softkey selection box to the desired softkey using the arrows of the SEL Key.
3) Press the center of the SEL Key to select the desired softkey.
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
• INSET
Removes Inset Map
OFF
DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except active flight plan
TRAFFIC Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TOPO
TERRAIN Displays/removes terrain information on Inset Map
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope weather information on Inset Map (Columbia 350 only,
optional)
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays current and Selected Altitudes in meters, in addition to feet; also changes barometric
setting to hectopascals (hPa) from inches of mercury (in Hg)
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
DFLTS
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
BRG1
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
OFF: Removes window
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
360 HSI
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information Windows unavailable)
ARC HSI
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
BRG2
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
OFF: Removes window
STD BARO Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if METRIC Softkey is selected)
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
• OBS
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation sources on the HSI
• CDI
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
• XPDR
Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
STBY
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
ON
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies to identification and altitude
ALT
interrogations)
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
VFR
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
CODE
Use numbers to enter code
0—7
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
BKSP
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
• IDENT
transponder return on the ATC screen
• TMR/REF Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
• NRST
Displays/removes Alerts Window
• ALERTS
• PFD
METRIC
�����
���
���
���
����
�����
�������
����
������
������������������������������������������
�������������������������������������
Figure 1-15 Top Level PFD Softkeys
1-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
�����
����������
���������� ����������
���������
���
�������
�����
����
������� ������
������ �������
�������
����
������
�����������������������������
������������������������������������
�������
�������
Figure 1-16 INSET Softkeys
���
�����
������
����
�������
�������
��������
����
��������������������������������������������
������������������������������������������
�����������������������������������������������
����
������
���������������������
��������������������������
�����������������������
Figure 1-17 PFD Configuration Softkeys
����
����
��
���
���
����
�����
����
������
��������������������������������
��������������������������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�����
����
����
������
��������������������������������
������������������������������������
Figure 1-18 XPDR Softkeys
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
• SYSTEM
OXYGEN
DCLTR
ASSIST
CO RST
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
• MAP
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
BACK
• DCLTR (3)
• CHKLIST
Displays EIS Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit EIS Page (see the EIS
Section for more information)
Turns oxygen system ON/OFF
Turns off CHT and EGT cylinder readouts
Accesses engine leaning assist mode
Resets the CO Guardian and acknowledges CO warning alert
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to 98 gallons and fuel used to zero
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes Stormscope weather information on Navigation Map Page (Columbia 350
only, optional)
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
Displays the Checklist Page; press the EXIT Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys
������
���
�����
�������
�������
�������
���������������������������
���������������������������������
������
������
�������
�����
������
������
����������
���������� ����������
���������
�������
����
�������
������
������
�������� �������� ��������
�������������������������
���������������������������������
�������
����
Figure 1-19 MFD Softkeys (EIS and Navigation Map)
1-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all
window/page group operations are described in Section 1.6, G1000 Controls. Softkey presses do not display
menus or submenus.
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
No Options for
NRST Window
Options for FPL Window
Figure 1-20 Page Menu Examples
DATA ENTRY
Two methods exist for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric
minimum descent altitude) into the G1000: using the using the alphanumeric keypad (on the MFD/PFD Control
Unit) or the FMS Knob corresponding to the display (PFD, MFD, or MFD/PFD Control Unit).
In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G1000 will try to predict the desired identifier
based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm
the entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the
characters of the identifier.
Using the MFD/PFD Control Unit keypad to enter data:
1) Choose the desired display control mode by pressing the PFD or MFD Key on the MFD/PFD Control Unit.
2) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) Use the alphanumeric keys to enter the desired information.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry
6) Press the CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field revers back to its previous information).
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data by turning the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in
the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite direction.
4) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
5) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
6) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of
the current page within the group are indicated by icons. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedure/Weather
Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the title of the page may change while the page icon remains the same.
Page Group
Active Page Title
Figure 1-23 Page Title
Page Groups
MFD
Pages in Current Group
Selected Page
Figure 1-24 Page Group Icons
There are four main page groups, navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
1-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
Stormscope (Columbia 350 only,
optional)
Weather Data Link (optional)
Terrain/TAWS (TAWS optional)
Figure 1-23 Map Pages
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite screens (optional)
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
XM
Pages
System Status
Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the
page. In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is pressed, even if a
different page group is selected.
1-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
Vertical Navigation
Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
Figure 1-28 Procedure Loading Pages
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETUP AND STATUS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The System
Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page displays the status
of all G1000 System LRUs.
AUX - SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• Audio alert voice
• Displayed measurement units
• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields
• Map datum
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
• Airspace alerts
• COM transceiver channel spacing
• Arrival alert
• Displayed nearest airports
Figure 1-29 System Setup Page
1-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PILOT PROFILES
NOTE: Pilot profile names cannot start with a blank as the first letter in the name.
System settings configured on the System Setup Page may be saved under a pilot profile. The G1000 will
store up to 25 profiles; the currently active profile and amount of memory used and available are shown
at the top of the System Setup Page in the Pilot Profile Box. From this box, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
OR:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DATE/TIME
The Date/Time Box on the System Setup page displays the current date and time and allows the pilot
to set the time format (local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC) and offset. The time offset is used to define
current local time. UTC (also called “GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS
satellites signals and cannot be changed. When using a local time format, designate the offset by adding or
subtracting the desired number of hours.
Setting the system time format:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC).
5) Press the ENT Key.
Setting the current time offset:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.
4) Enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.
1-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
The Display Units Box on the System Setup Page allows configuration of the measurement units used for
the following displayed data:
• Nav angle (auto, true)
• Temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
• Distance and speed (metric, nautical)
• Fuel and fuel flow (gallons, imperial gallons,
kilograms, liters, pounds)
• Altitude and vertical speed (feet, meters)
• Position (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”,
• Barometric pressure (inches of mercury,
MGRS, UTM/UPS)
hectopascals)
For the navigation angle, if ‘Auto’ is selected, all track, course, and heading information is corrected to the
computed magnetic variation, shown as MAG VAR in the Display Units Box . The “True” setting references
all information to true north.
Changing a display units setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units.
5) Press the ENT Key when the desired unit is highlighted.
6) To cancel the process without changing the units, press the CLR Key.
MAP DATUM
NOTE: Per TSO C129a, the WSG 84 map datum should be used in the United States. For use outside the U.S.,
select the geodetic datum required by that country. See Appendix E for a list of available map datums.
The aviation database contains over 100 map datums to adjust position reading, making it conform to
specific paper charts. The default datum setting is WSG 84. If charts based on another datum are being
used, the G1000 should be set to use the same datum. Using a map datum that does not match the
paper charts can result in significant differences in position information. If paper charts are being used
for reference only, the G1000 still provides correct navigation guidance to the waypoints contained in the
database, regardless of the datum selected.
The Map Datum Box on the System Setup Page allows selection of the map datum to be used by the
G1000 from a list of datums available in the current aviation database.
Selecting a Map Datum:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the datum in the Map Datum Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the list of available map datums.
5) Press the ENT Key when the desired datum is highlighted.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE ALERTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the MFD Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:
• Class B/TMA
• Restricted
• Class C/TCA
• MOA (Military)
• Class D
• Other airspaces
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message will not be generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and
projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer
is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
1-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice.
5) Press the ENT Key.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup Page can be used to change the configuration of
the data fields in the Navigation Status Box on the MFD. By default, the Navigation Status Box is set to
display ground speed (GS), distance to next waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute
safe altitude (ESA). The Navigation Status Box on the PFD is not affected.
Changing the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Box field:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the data options list.
5) Press the ENT Key.
The following data may be selected for display in the four fields of the MFD Navigation Status Box.
• Bearing (BRG)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Distance (DIS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Track (TRK)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS CDI
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen Course
Deviation Indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps up to 5 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 5.0 nautical
miles during the enroute phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually
ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even
further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for enroute and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page displays the following:
• Selected CDI range (AUTO, 5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• Current system CDI range (5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• ILS CDI capture mode setting (AUTO, MANUAL)
Changing the CDI range:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the selected field in the GPS CDI Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the range list.
5) Press the ENT Key.
Changing the ILS CDI capture setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ILS CDI capture field in the GPS CDI Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired mode.
5) Press the ENT Key.
1-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
COM CONFIGURATION
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key.
NEAREST AIRPORTS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that
are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway
length and “any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water).
5) Press the ENT Key.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUX - SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Columbia service center
or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Figure 1-30 Example System Status Page
The LRU, ARFRM, and DBASE softkeys on the System Status Page select the box (LRU Info, Airframe,
or Database) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll if all the information cannot appear on the
screen. The cursor can also be placed in the desired box using the System Status Page Menu.
The ANN TEST Softkey, when depressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
1-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: The checklists presented in this section are for example only and may not reflect checklists actually
available for the Columbia 350/400. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the
checklist information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of the checklists. User-defined checklists are created by
the aircraft manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft
manufacturer. The user cannot edit the checklists.
The MFD is able to display electronic checklists customized for the Columbia 350/400. The G1000 accesses
the checklists from an SD card inserted into the bezel slot (see Figure 1-3). Selecting the CHKLIST Softkey
allows access to all checklists. Selecting the EXIT Softkey or momentarily holding down the CLR Key exits the
Checklist Page and returns to the page last viewed.
If the SD card contains a valid checklist file, the power-up splash screen displays both the aircraft make and
model to which the checklist applies and copyright information. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file
or no checklist, the Checklist Page displays ‘INVALID CHECKLIST’ or ‘CHECKLIST NOT PRESENT’ and the
CHKLIST Softkey is greyed out. Selecting the EMERGCY Softkey accesses the emergency procedures.
Figure 1-31 Checklist Page Example
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Checklist Page displays the following:
• Selected checklist text:
• Selected procedure group
(number of procedure groups
– Plain text
depends on airframe)
– Notes, Cautions, and
• Selected checklist title
Warnings
– Challenge/Response pairs
– Challenges with no responses
– Check state of items
– Checklist complete indicator
Navigating a checklist:
1) From any page, select the CHKLIST Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With the desired checklist displayed, turn the FMS Knob to move up and down the checklist and highlight an
item with a hollow white rectangle. The default color for non-selected checklist items is blue; once an item is
highlighted, it turns white.
Press the CLR Key to remove a check mark from an item.
9) Once the last item in a checklist is selected, ‘GO TO THE NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key
to advance to the next checklist displayed.
10) To select a checklist item that is highlighted, press the ENT Key or DONE Softkey. Selected items turn green and
checkmarks are placed in the boxes next to the item. After an item is selected, the next item is automatically
highlighted for selection.
Figure 1-32 Sample Checklist
1-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the
MENU Key while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel, MFD/PFD Control Unit, and Audio Panel keys can
be adjusted automatically or manually. Backlighting intensity ranges from 0.14% to 100%.
The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust for
ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions.
Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the
following procedures:
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
PFD
Figure 1-33 PFD Setup Menu
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With the intensity value now highlighted, enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
1-37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With the intensity value now highlighted, enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
1-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer
to the backup instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS modes.
This section describes the flight instruments and supplemental flight data featured on the G1000 Primary
Flight Display (PFD) as installed on Columbia 350/400 aircraft. The G1000 System controls were designed so
that regardless of which seat the pilot is flying from, the aircraft can be flown with one hand and the controls
manipulated with the other hand.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instrument “six-pack” on the instrument
panel with an easy-to-scan display that provides a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, annunciations,
terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other supporting sections
of this Pilot’s Guide
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– True airspeed
• Vertical Deviation/Glideslope
Indicator
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Trend vector
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
• Timer/References Window,
showing
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Reference flags
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• Altimeter, showing
– Trend vector
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude
• System time
– Generic timer
– Heading and course indications
– Vspeed values and flags
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Barometric minimum descent
altitude (MDA, DH)
– Navigation source
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-1
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
1
18
17
16
15
14
2
13
12
3
11
4
10
9
5
6
8
7
1
NAV Frequency Box
10 Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
11 Altimeter Barometric Setting
3
True Airspeed
12 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
13 Altimeter
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
14 Selected Altitude
6
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
15 COM Frequency Box
7
Softkeys
16 Navigation Status Box
8
System Time
17 Slip/Skid Indicator
9
Transponder Status Box
18 Attitude Indicator
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
2-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
10
1
9
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
Traffic Annunciation
6
Alerts Window
2
Selected Heading
7
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
3
Inset Map
8
Annunciation Window
4
Bearing Information Windows
9
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
5
Selected Course
10 Marker Beacon Annunciation
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-3
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for speed criteria.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator.
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60
knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer
remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
Airspeed
Trend Vector
Speed
Ranges
Actual
Airspeed
Vspeed
References
Figure 2-4 Red Pointer at VNE
True
Airspeed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
SPEED AWARENESS RANGES
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red
range is also present for low speed awareness. The speed ranges are altitude sensitive and change for altitudes
above 12,000 feet.
AIRSPEED TREND VECTOR
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the airspeed scale, shown
to the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted
airspeed in six seconds if the current rate of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the
text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant
or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
2-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VSPEED REFERENCES
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for Vspeed values.
Vspeeds (Glide, VX, and VY) can be changed and their flags turned ON/OFF from the Timer/References
Window. When active (ON), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed values are reset and all flags turned OFF when power is cycled.
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags ON/OFF:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.
3) Enter the desired speed and press the ENT Key (when a speed has been changed from a default value, an
asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) With the flag ON/OFF field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-5 Timer/References Window
Figure 2-6 Timer/References Menu
Turning all Vspeed flags ON/OFF:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To turn all Vspeed flags ON, press the ENT Key with ‘All References ON’ highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References OFF’.
5) Press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-5
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
NOTE: Some supplemental PFD information disappears when pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚.
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
2
6
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-7 Attitude Indicator
PITCH INDICATION
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up
to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch
marks occur every 2.5˚.
Red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the horizon are displayed, starting at 50˚ above and
30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose High
Nose Low
Figure 2-8 Pitch Attitude Warnings
2-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ROLL AND SLIP/SKID INDICATION
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor
tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the
position of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location
of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional
Slip/Skid Indicator.
Figure 2-9 Slip/Skid Indication
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values in feet on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Bug
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Current
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Current
Altitude
(Meters)
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-10 Altimeter
Figure 2-11 Altimeter (Metric)
ALTITUDE TREND VECTOR
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-7
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER BAROMETRIC SETTING
The Altimeter barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or
hectopascals (hPa) when the METRIC Softkey is selected.
Selecting the barometric Altimeter setting:
Turn the BARO (outer) Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select the STD BARO Softkey.
SELECTED ALTITUDE
NOTE: See the AFCS Section for more information about how the G1000 uses the Selected Altitude.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A
bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on
the tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. The metric value, when selected, is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small for 100-ft
increments).
METRIC DISPLAY
Selected and current altitudes can be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts in
feet) and the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (see Figure 2-11). Note that the altitude tape does
not change scale.
Displaying altitude and the Altimeter barometric setting in metric units:
1) Select the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the METRIC Softkey to display altitudes in meters and the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals.
3) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
2-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION/GLIDESLOPE INDICATOR
The Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears to the left of the Altimeter when an ILS
is tuned in the active NAV field (and selected on the Audio Panel). A green diamond appears and acts as the
Vertical Deviation Indicator, just like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-13) displays the aircraft’s vertical speed with numeric labels and
tick marks at 1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals
of 500 fpm.
The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and
the rate appears inside the pointer.
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Vertical
Deviation/
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 2-12 Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-9
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. The HSI presents heading, turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source
information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Select the PFD Softkey
2) Select the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
The 360˚ HSI (Figure 2-14) contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, TO/FROM
Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and
LOC1) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The TO/
FROM arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
14
13
1
12
2
11
3
10
4
9
8
5
7
1
Turn Rate Indicator
8
TO/FROM Indicator
2
Lateral Deviation Scale
9
Heading Bug
3
Navigation Source
10 Course Pointer
4
Aircraft Symbol
11 Flight Phase
5
12 Turn Rate and Heading
6
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
7
OBS Mode Active
6
Trend Vector
13 Current Heading
14 Lubber Line
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
The Arc HSI (Figure 2-15) is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course
Pointer, TO/FROM Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the TO/FROM and deviation indicators are
combined), and a deviation scale.
Course Pointer
Navigation Source
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Lateral
Deviation Scale
Course Deviation and
TO/FROM Indicator
Figure 2-15 Arc HSI
2-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Upon station passage, the TO/FROM indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like the
conventional TO/FROM flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
HEADING AND COURSE INDICATIONS
NOTE: See the AFCS Section for more information on Selected Heading functions.
A digital reading of the current magnetic heading appears on top of the HSI. The heading displayed on the
HSI is always magnetic, even if the NAV ANGLE is set to ‘TRUE’ on the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD
(see the System Overview for details).
When the pilot selects a course by rotating the CRS Knob, a digital reading appears for three seconds in a
box to the right of the lubber line, next to the HSI. Pressing the CRS Knob displays the digital reading, recenters the CDI, and returns the course pointer TO the bearing of the active waypoint or navigation station
(see OBS Mode for information on adjusting a GPS course).
When the pilot selects a heading by rotating the HDG Knob, a digital reading appears for three seconds in a
box to the left of the lubber line, next to the HSI. A rotatable heading bug marks the desired heading on the
HSI. This Selected Heading Bug and the current aircraft heading can be synchronized by pressing the HDG
Knob, which moves the bug to the current heading.
Selected
Heading
Current
Heading
Selected
Selected
Heading Bug Course
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and
the prediction is no longer valid (Figure 2-17).
A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick
mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading (Figure 2-18).
Half-Standard Turn
Rate Tick Mark
Standard Turn
Rate Tick Mark
Turn Rate
Trend Vector
(Rate > 4
deg/sec)
Figure 2-17 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Turn Rate
Trend Vector
(Standard Rate)
Figure 2-18 Standard-Rate Turn Indication
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-11
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
NAVIGATION SOURCE
The HSI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer, and glideslope). The CDI
Softkey cycles through the navigation sources. Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta (for
GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC).
Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources with Example HSI Annunciations
‘INTEG’ (Loss of Integrity–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight) or ‘WARN’ (GPS
position error) annunciations may appear in yellow on the HSI to indicate abnormal GPS conditions.
Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The light blue tuning box is placed over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Select the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The light blue tuning box is
placed over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Select the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
AUTOMATIC NAVIGATION SOURCE SWITCHING
On the AUX - System Setup Page, ILS CDI capture may be changed to ‘MANUAL’. In ‘AUTO’ (default)
setting, the system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
2-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the HSI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
Vector-to-Final (see the GPS Navigation Section) also causes the HSI to switch to LOC navigation source,
although the change is not considered automatic to the system and GPS steering guidance is not provided
after this switch.
Changing the ILS CDI Capture setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ILS CDI CAPTURE’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
OBS MODE
NOTE: The OBS Softkey is available only when navigating an active leg using GPS.
Enabling Omni Bearing Selector (OBS) Mode (with the OBS Softkey) suspends the automatic sequencing
of waypoints in a GPS flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current
“active-to” waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. When OBS is disabled
(the OBS Softkey is selected again), the GPS returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of
waypoints. OBS Mode also allows a desired course TO/FROM a waypoint to be set (with the CRS Knob);
pressing the CRS Knob recenters the CDI and returns the course pointer TO the waypoint bearing.
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI (to the lower right of the aircraft symbol) in place of ‘OBS’ and
the OBS Softkey label changes to SUSP. Selecting the SUSP Softkey resumes automatic of approach
waypoints.
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating with GPS:
1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course TO/FROM the waypoint.
3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to normal operation.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-13
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR
NOTE: If the pilot makes a heading change greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc
HSI switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course (Figure 2-20). If the CDI exceeds the maximum
deviation on the scale (two dots), the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the aircraft symbol.
360º HSI
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Scale
CDI and TO/FROM Indicator
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
The CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI when coupled to a VOR or LOC. When coupled
to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived distance (5.0, 1.0, or 0.3 nm). The
current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘SYSTEM CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the scale
setting may also be changed (5.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or AUTO) from this page (Figure 2-21). When set to
‘AUTO’ (default), the CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of
flight:
• Leaving the departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 nm and gradually ramps up to 5.0 nm beyond 30
nm from the departure airport
• The CDI scale is set to 5.0 nm during the enroute phase of flight
• Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI scale gradually ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area)
• During approach operations, the CDI scale ramps down even further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during any
phase of flight and the selected setting is displayed instead of the flight phase annunciation. For example, if
1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for enroute and terminal phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during
an approach. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI
scale and corresponding flight phases.
2-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECTED’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
Figure 2-21 System Setup Page,
GPS CDI Settings
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the bearing information windows and pointers are disabled.
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Two bearing pointers and associated information (Figure 2-22) can be displayed on the HSI by selecting
the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. Use the BRG Softkey to cycle through bearing sources (NAV, GPS).
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective
information window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring (shown even when bearing pointers are selected but not
necessarily visible due to data unavailability).
Bearing 1
Pointer
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2
Pointer
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
Pointer
Icon
Pointer
Icon
Bearing 1
Information
Window
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2
Information
Window
Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing Information
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-15
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (single line for BRG1, double line for BRG2)
• Frequency (NAV,)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing source
If the NAV radio is the selected bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing pointer is
removed from the HSI and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. If the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned
VOR station, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency displayed in the information
window is replaced with “NO DATA”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is
replaced by the station identifier when the station is within range.
If GPS is the selected bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency. If an
active waypoint is not selected, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in
the information window.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Select the PFD Softkey.
2) Select a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Select the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
2-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Some supplemental PFD information disappears when pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚.
NOTE: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display and the
Inset Map. Selection of this softkey does not restore display units to the default settings.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) by default in the lower left of the
PFD under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode.
Reversionary Mode
Normal Display
Figure 2-23 Outside Air Temperature
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired unit.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
Figure 2-24 System Setup Page,
Display Units Settings
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-17
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM TIME
The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Three display formats are available, local
12-hr, local 24-hr, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Time and date are obtained from the GPS satellites
and cannot be changed, although a time offset may be entered (±HH:MM) for local times.
Figure 2-25 System Time
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. The TIME FORMAT field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The TIME OFFSET field is highlighted.
5) Enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM).
6) Press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
Figure 2-26 System Setup Page,
Date/Time Settings
2-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TIMER/REFERENCES WINDOW
NOTE: Refer to Section 2.2 under the Airspeed Indicator discussion for information on Vspeeds and Section
2.4 for information on the barometric minimum descent altitude.
The Timer/References Window is enabled/disabled in the lower right corner of the PFD by selecting the TMR/
REF Softkey. This window provides access to the following settings:
• Generic Timer
• Vspeed values and flags
• Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA, DH)
Figure 2-27 Timer/References Window
GENERIC TIMER
The PFD generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero, an aural advisory sounds, “Timer expired”, and the digits begin to
count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial
value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-19
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A.
ALERTS WINDOW
Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD) when a warning, caution, advisory
alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. This window allows system alerts to be displayed simultaneously.
The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window is enabled/disabled by
selecting the ALERTS Softkey.
System alert messages are provided to make the pilot aware of G1000 system problems or status and may
not require pilot action. The ALERTS Softkey label flashes white when a system alert message is generated.
Selecting the ALERTS Softkey acknowledges the presence of the alert and opens the Alerts Window.
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 2-28 G1000 Alerting System
2-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ANNUNCIATION WINDOW
NOTE: New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window, separated by
a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in yellow,
advisory alerts in white.
SOFTKEY ANNUNCIATIONS
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by selecting the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display a
descriptive message of the alert.
Warnings are time-critical and require immediate pilot attention. A flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation
and aural tone (single chime every two seconds) are used to alert the pilot of any warnings. The aural tone
and flashing WARNING annunciator continue until acknowledged by the pilot (by selecting the WARNING
Softkey).
Caution indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A
flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation and single aural tone (one chime) are used to alert the pilot of any
cautions. The flashing CAUTION annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by selecting
the CAUTION Softkey).
An advisory provides general information to the pilot that may not need immediate attention. A flashing
ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (no aural tone) is used to alert the pilot of any message advisories. The
flashing ADVISORY annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by selecting the ADVISORY
Softkey).
Figure 2-29 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey labels)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-21
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic Information
Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS).
NOTE: If a second TA appears or if the number of TAs displayed decreases then increases, new aural and
visual alerts are generated.
The G1000 System displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and
various other MFD page maps. When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occurs:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-33) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed
(refer to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment).
TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and
annunciations.
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations (Figure 2-34) appear on the PFD to the upper
left of the Altimeter (also where the Marker Beacon Annunciations appear).
Figure 2-30 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
2-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated by a blue light, middle by amber, and inner by white.
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
Altimeter
Figure 2-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of
the GFC 700 AFCS.
The following occurs when approach the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for five seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text
on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Figure 2-32 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
2-23
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
BAROMETRIC MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE
The desired barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA, or Decision Height, DH) can be set in the Timer/
References Window. When active, the MDA is displayed in the box labeled ‘BARO MIN’ to the lower left of the
Altimeter and a bug appears at the corresponding altitude on the tape (Figure 2-34).
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the BARO MIN field.
3) Enter the desired altitude and press the ENT Key.
4) In the highlighted ON/OFF field, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
Figure 2-33 Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
Visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears with
the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the tape in light blue once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft descends past the MDA, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground. If the aircraft climbs proceeds to climb after having
reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting is disabled.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
Barometric
Minimum Bug
Barometric
Minimum Box
Figure 2-34 Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
2-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Columbia 350/400 displays critical engine, electrical, fuel,
and other system parameters on the left side of the MFD during normal operations. EIS information can be
fully expanded to an entire page (Engine Page) using the SYSTEM Softkey. In reversionary display mode, the
remaining display is re-configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System
Overview for information about reversionary display mode).
EIS Display
Figure 3-1 MFD (Columbia 400)
Instrument types include dial gauges, horizontal and vertical bar indicators, digital readouts, slide bars, and
bar graphs. Green bands indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and
warning, respectively. White bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the caution or warning
ranges.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate cautions and warnings.
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the instrument.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
3-1
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
NOTE: For engine speeds less than 500 rpm, no warning occurs for manifold pressure, oil pressure, oil
temperature, Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), or bus voltage outside the acceptable operating range.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3-2
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal)
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °F)
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT °F)
Columbia 350 only
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Indicator (TIT °F)
Columbia 400 only
Cylinder Head Temperature
Indicator (CHT °F)
Trim Group (AILERON
TRIM, ELEV TRIM)
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
A light blue marker is displayed next to the selected fuel tank. If the
tanks become unbalanced by at least 10 gal, the marker flashes.
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Oil pressure is displayed in pounds per square inch (psi)
Oil temperature is shown in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Shows the Exhaust Gas Temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is
shown in pointer) in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Displays the inlet temperature for both turbine inlets in degrees
Fahrenheit (°F); the inlet number is shown in pointer
Shows the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is shown
in pointer) in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Aileron and elevator trim are displayed on slide bars; the green portions
of the bars represent correct takeoff trim positions
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
9
10
Columbia 350
Columbia 400
Figure 3-3 EIS Display
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
3-3
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
Selecting the SYSTEM Softkey on the MFD accesses the Engine Page, which displays all Engine Indication
System instruments; selecting the softkey again exits the Engine Page.
The Engine Page displays engine, fuel, fuel calculation, electrical, oxygen, and trim information using round dial
gauges, bar indicators, bar graphs, digital readouts, and slide bars. As in the EIS Display, the manifold pressure
gauge, tachometer, and trim slide bars are shown. Fuel flow and oil parameters are displayed using gauges rather
than horizontal bar indicators.
Oxygen quantity and outlet pressure are also shown on the Engine Page. The OXYGEN Softkey can be used
to turn the oxygen system ON/OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
3-4
Oil Temperature/Pressure
Gauge
(OIL °F PSI)
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge
(MAN IN HG)
Tachometer
(RPM)
Fuel Calculations Group
(GAL REM, GAL USED,
ENDUR, RANGE NM)
Oxygen Quantity Gauge
(OXY QTY PSI)
Oxygen Outlet Pressure
Gauge
(OXY OUTLET PSI)
Electrical Group
(ALT AMPS, BATT AMPS,
BUS VOLTS)
Trim Group
(AILERON TRIM,
ELEV TRIM)
Engine Temperature Group
(EGT °F, CHT °F, TIT °F)
Fuel Quantity Gauges
(L/R FUEL QTY GAL)
Fuel Flow Gauge
(FFLOW GPH)
Oil temperature is shown on the left half in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and
pressure is displayed on the right in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
The fuel totalizer fuel remaining and used and the totalizer-based
endurance and range calculations are displayed
Oxygen amount given in terms of pressure (psi); note that gauge
increment is 100 psi
Oxygen outlet pressure in psi
Currents for the right and left alternators and batteries along with bus
voltages are displayed using vertical bar indicators and readouts
Aileron and elevator trim are displayed on slide bars.
For each cylinder, the exhaust gas and head temperatures are shown in
degrees Fahrenheit (°F). The temperature for both turbine inlets in
°F is also shown.
Gauges display the amount of fuel in gallons (gal)
The light blue indicator light for the selected tank flashes if tanks become
unbalanced by at least 10 gal
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
11
6
10
7
9
8
Carbon
Monoxide
Warning
Figure 3-4 Engine Page (Columbia 350)
1
2
3
4
5
11
6
10
7
9
8
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (Columbia 400)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
3-5
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION
If carbon monoxide (CO) in the cabin becomes too high, a flashing red annunciation and level of CO in parts
per million (ppm) are displayed in the lower right corner of the Engine Page.
Figure 3-4 Carbon Monoxide Warning
When a warning is generated, the CO RST Softkey becomes available to reset the CO Guardian and
acknowledge the alert. A warning annunciation is also displayed on the PFD in the Annunciations Window
along with an aural warning (refer to the aircraft-specific alerts in Appendix A).
FUEL CALCULATIONS GROUP
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), and range (RANGE NM) are all calculated based on the
displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The fuel remaining can be adjusted using the
following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to the aircraft’s fuel capacity (98 gal usable) and sets the
GAL USED display to zero
Fuel
Remaining
Endurance
Calculation
Fuel Used
Calculation
Range
Calculation
Figure 3-5 Fuel Calculations Group
3-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
ENGINE TEMPERATURE GROUP
The temperature group displays the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) and Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)
in degrees Fahrenheit for each cylinder using bar graphs and digital readouts. For the Columbia 400, Turbine
Inlet Temperature (TIT) is shown on a sliding bar scale.
The following softkeys can be used to modify the display of engine temperature information:
• DCLTR – Removes/displays the EGT and CHT readouts from the display
• ASSIST – Accesses the Engine Leaning Assist Mode (see Section 3.3)
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Figure 3-6 Engine Temperature Group (Columbia 400)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
3-7
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 ENGINE LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: Consult the Columbia 350/400 Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for leaning procedures.
From the Engine Page, the Engine Leaning Assist Mode may be accessed by selecting the ASSIST Softkey.
Selecting the ASSIST Softkey again returns the MFD to the Engine Page. Use the SYSTEM Softkey to exit the
Engine Page.
While in Assist Mode, the EIS Display is shown along with the Fuel Flow Gauge and an expanded Engine
Temperature Group.
COLUMBIA 350
When the ASSIST Softkey is selected, the system initially highlights the number and EGT readout of the
cylinder with the hottest EGT.
EIS Display
Fuel Flow
Gauge
EGT Deviation
from Peak
Figure 3-7 Engine Leaning Assist Mode (Columbia 350)
3-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
When the first peak is detected, the cylinder numbers disappear, “1st” is annunciated in light blue below that
cylinder’s EGT bar, the temperature is marked in light blue on the graph, and the EGT readout is outlined.
Temperature
Deviation from Peak
(First Cylinder)
Light Blue Bar
Represents Peak
Indicates First
Cylinder to Peak
Figure 3-8 Assist Mode - First Peaked Cylinder (Columbia 350)
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder as the fuel flow is decreased and the peak of
each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker. The last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last”
annunciation below its bar on the graph and the EGT readout is outlined in light blue.
Temperature
Deviation from Peak
(Last Cylinder)
Indicates Last
Cylinder to Peak
Figure 3-9 Assist Mode - Last Peaked Cylinder (Columbia 350)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
3-9
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
COLUMBIA 400
Once the ASSIST Softkey is selected, the peak of each TIT is indicated by a light blue bar which moves and
remains at the peak Turbine Inlet Temperature.
Peak TIT
Figure 3-10 Engine Leaning Assist Mode (Columbia 400)
3-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
TIT Deviation
from Peak
Lean or Rich
From Peak
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
This section describes the features and operation of the Audio Panel and COM/NAV/Surveillance (CNS) systems.
The CNS interface includes the COM, NAV, and Transponder.
4.1 AUDIO PANEL DESCRIPTION
The GMA 1347 is an Audio Control Panel and Marker Beacon System. The Audio Panel provides the traditional
audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio switching. It contains a digital clearance recorder
that continuously captures the last two and one half minutes of selected COM transceiver audio. Recording is
automatic when a COM signal is received. Playback is controlled by pressing the PLAY Key. Playback can be
stopped by pressing the MKR/MUTE Key.
The unit also includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) with electronic cabin noise de-emphasis and two
stereo music inputs for the pilot, copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides four selectable modes
of isolation (All, Crew, Pilot, Copilot).
Pressing the Audio Panel keys controls audio selection of COM, NAV, and intercom. LED annunciators indicate
when a key function is selected.
A speaker output is available for listening to selected aircraft radios on the cabin speaker. MASQ (Master
Avionics Squelch) processing reduces ambient noise from the avionics inputs.
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch is available for the ICS by pressing
the MAN SQ Key.
The unit controls marker beacon receiver audio and features marker beacon audio muting.
As part of the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck, the GMA 1347 also controls the Display Reversionary Mode.
The Audio Panel features controls for three major function groups:
• Communication
• Navigation
• Intercom system (ICS)
The controls are labeled to indicate the name of the function. The triangular annunciator above each key
indicates when the key function is selected.
The knobs at the bottom of the unit control ICS volume and squelch threshold levels. The small knob adjusts the
volume/squelch level for the pilot. The large knob adjusts the volume/squelch level for the copilot/passenger.
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button below the volume/squelch knob controls Reversionary Mode selection.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-1
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSCEIVERS
NOTE: A push-to-talk (PTT) Key must be pressed to transmit on the selected radio.
The Audio Panel handles two separate transceivers:
• COM1 MIC
• COM2 MIC
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only, unless their headset has a mono/stereo switch that is set to mono.
UNMUTED/UNSWITCHED INPUTS
The Audio Panel provides four unmuted/unswitched inputs that are always present on the headsets or speaker.
These inputs are the following aural warnings:
• ALTITUDE WARNING
• UNSWITCHED 1
• UNSWITCHED 2
• UNSWITCHED 3
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
• Transceiver audio selector keys
(COM1, COM2)
• Marker Beacon Receiver High Sensitivity Key
(HI SENS)
• Split COM Key (Not recommended for use
in Columbia 350/400 aircraft)
(COM 1/2)
• Aircraft radio audio selector keys
(NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, AUX)
• Transmitter (audio/mic) selection keys
(COM1 MIC, COM2 MIC)
• Passenger Address Key
(PA)
• Digital Recording Playback Key
(PLAY)
• Intercom system (ICS) isolation key
(PILOT COPLT)
• Speaker Key
(SPKR)
• Marker Beacon Receiver Audio Select/Mute Key
(MKR/MUTE)
4-2
• Intercom Manual Squelch Key
(MAN SQ)
• Volume/Squelch Knob
(ICS)
• Reversionary Mode Button
(DISPLAY BACKUP)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Transmitters
Transceiver Audio
Disabled on Columbia
350/400 Aircraft
Split COM
(Not Recommended for
use in Columbia 350/400
Aircraft)
Speaker
Passenger Address
Marker Beacon/Mute
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity
Navigation Radio Audio
Disabled on Columbia
350/400 Aircraft
Manual Squelch
Digital Recording Playback
ICS Isolation
VOL/SQ
VOL Annunciation
SQ Annunciation
Reversionary Mode Control
Figure 4-1 Audio Panel Controls
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-3
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 AUDIO PANEL OPERATION
POWER-UP AND FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator
lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most settings are restored
to the ones in use before the unit was last turned off.
FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
A fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly to COM1 in case power is interrupted
or the unit is turned off. In this case, audio is not available on the speaker.
KEY ANNUNCIATORS
Pressing any key on the Audio Panel activates and deactivates the function. Triangular annunciators above
each key illuminate to show when the function is on or off (Figure 4-2). Annunciators do not illuminate on a
disabled function.
KEY BACKLIGHTING
Key annunciators and backlighting can be manually adjusted from the PFD or automatically controlled by a
photocell.
4-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSCEIVER KEYS
The following four transceiver keys appear at the top of the Audio Panel: COM1 MIC, COM2 MIC, COM1,
and COM2 (Figure 4-2). COM Audio can be selected by pressing either the desired COM Key or by pressing
a COM MIC Key.
The Columbia 350/400 is not factory-equipped with COM3 MIC, COM3, or TEL capability. Pressing the
COM3 MIC, COM3, or TEL Key does not illuminate the associated annunciator light.
Annunciator
Disabled on
Columbia 350/400
Aircraft
Split COM
Figure 4-2 Transceiver Keys
COM MIC KEYS
Pressing the COM1 MIC Key selects the COM1 radio as the active transceiver. Pressing the COM2 MIC Key
selects the COM2 radio as the active transceiver. The Receiver Audio Key, COM1, or COM2 is also selected.
The COM frequency is highlighted in green in the active frequency field of the PFD and MFD.
Only one transceiver can be selected at a time. If COM2 MIC Key is pressed when COM1 MIC is active, the
unit switches to COM2.
COM RECEIVE KEYS
Pressing the COM1 Receiver Key selects the COM1 radio as an active receiver. Pressing the COM2 Receiver
Key selects the COM2 radio as an active receiver. Any combination of radios can be selected separately or
simultaneously regardless of the active transceiver selection. The active COM radio is always heard on the
headsets.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-5
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSMITTING
NOTE: Audio level of the COM radio(s) is controlled by the COM volume controls located on both the PFD
and the MFD.
When the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC Key Annunciator flashes
approximately once per second. A white TX indication appears next to the active COM frequency on both
displays during transmission.
SECONDARY COM MUTING ON RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
All secondary COM audio is muted during detection of received primary COM audio as well as during
transmission over the primary COM radio.
SPLIT COM FUNCTION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the antennas and the separation of the
tuned frequencies. Split COM is not recommended for use in Columbia 350/400 Aircraft.
During split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able to monitor
COM2.
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects the split COM function. During split COM Operation, the COM1 MIC,
COM1, COM2 MIC, COM2, and COM 1/2 Keys are active.
When the COM 1/2 Key is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot for transmission and COM2 is used by the
copilot. The COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed and the COM2 MIC
Annunciator flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
Split COM Mode is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again.
PA FUNCTION
By pressing the PA Key, a passenger address function is provided for delivering voice messages over the cabin
speaker. Push-to-talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements.
When PA is selected on the Audio Panel, the PA Annunciator flashes once per second while the PTT Key is
pressed. Also, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the active COM frequency changes to white,
indicating that there is no COM selected.
Figure 4-3 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
4-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker (Figure 4-3). Speaker audio is muted when the PTT Key is pressed.
The speaker volume is adjustable above and below a nominal value. Contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for details.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The Marker Beacon Indicators operate independently of the Marker Beacon Audio and cannot be
turned off.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The Audio Panel marker beacon is used as part of the ILS system. The Marker Beacon Receiver is always
ON and receives at 75 MHz. The Audio Panel provides a Marker Beacon Audio muting capability.
The receiver detects the three marker tones, outer, middle, and inner, and illuminates the appropriate
Marker Beacon Indicators. The Marker Beacon Indicators are located to the left of the altimeter on the PFD
(Figure 4-4).
MM
OM
Outer Marker Indication
Middle Marker Indication
IM
Inner Marker Indication
Figure 4-4 Marker Beacon Signal Indicator Lights on the PFD
When the MKR/MUTE Key is selected, the annunciator light illuminates and the audio signal can be heard
over the speaker or headsets during marker beacon reception.
Figure 4-5 Marker Beacon Keys
When the MKR/MUTE Key is annunciated and a Marker Beacon Tone is received, pressing the MKR/MUTE
Key mutes the audio but does not affect the annunciators. The audio returns when the next marker beacon
signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception, while Marker Beacon Audio is
muted, Marker Beacon Audio and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator light are turned off.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-7
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MARKER BEACON SIGNAL SENSITIVITY
Pressing the HI SENS Key (Figure 4-5) selects increased marker beacon signal sensitivity. The HI SENS
function is used to receive an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an approach.
NAVIGATION RADIOS
Pressing NAV1 or NAV2 Keys select and deselect the radio source and the annunciator (Figure 4-6). Selected
audio can be heard over the headset and the speaker. All radio keys can be selected independently.
When no further navigation radio audio is heard, the amount of background noise is reduced by the Master
Avionics Squelch (MASQ) feature.
Disabled on
Columbia 350/400
Aircraft
Figure 4-6 Navigation Radio Keys and Annunciators
4-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS)
The intercom system (ICS) provides four isolation modes: ALL, PILOT, COPILOT, and CREW. The desired
mode can be selected or deselected using the PILOT and COPLT Keys. The four possible ICS isolation states
are summarized in the table below.
Figure 4-7 ICS Keys
Mode
ALL
PILOT
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
OFF
ON
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
OFF
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 2
OFF
Selected radios;
pilot
Copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Copilot;
passengers;
MUSIC 2
Copilot
Selected radios;
pilot; passengers;
MUSIC 2
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC 2
COPILOT
OFF
ON
Selected radios;
pilot; passengers;
MUSIC 1
CREW
ON
ON
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot
Passenger Hears
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
PILOT MODE
PILOT isolation is selected when only the PILOT Key Annunciator is lit. In PILOT Mode, the pilot can hear
the selected radios. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each other.
COPILOT MODE
COPILOT isolation is selected when only the COPLT Key Annunciator is lit. In COPILOT Mode, the
copilot is isolated from the selected radios and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios and communicate with each other.
CREW MODE
CREW Mode is selected when both the PILOT and COPLT Key Annunciators are lit. In CREW Mode, both
the pilot and copilot can hear the selected radios and communicate with each other, while the passengers are
isolated but can communicate with each other.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-9
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALL MODE
ALL Mode is selected when both the PILOT and the COPLT Key Annunciators are not lit. In ALL Mode,
everyone hears the selected radios and is able to communicate with everyone else.
MASTER AVIONICS SQUELCH (MASQ)
MASQ (Master Avionics Squelch) reduces ambient noise from the aircraft radios. When no audio is detected,
MASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios.
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is not lit (Automatic Squelch is active), pressing the VOL/SQ Knob has no
effect on the VOL/SQ selection.
The MAN SQ Key and VOL/SQ Knob control the volume and squelch of the intercom. The MAN SQ Key
allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting. The VOL/SQ Knob controls volume or manual
squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
When the MAN SQ Annunciator is not lit (Automatic Squelch is on), the VOL/SQ Knob controls only the
volume. When the MAN SQ Annunciator is lit (Manual Squelch), the VOL/SQ Knob controls both volume and
squelch.
INTERCOM VOLUME CONTROL
The intercom volume is controlled with the VOL/SQ Knob. The small knob controls the pilot volume. The
large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning
counterclockwise decreases volume. When squelch is automatic (MAN SQ Annunciator is not lit) and the
VOL Annunciator at the bottom of the unit is lit, intercom volume may be adjusted.
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot
Copilot
Volume
Squelch
Figure 4-8 Volume/Squelch Control
4-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM MANUAL SQUELCH CONTROL
The intercom squelch function has the ability to quiet the ambient cockpit noise when no person is talking.
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch adjustment is also available if
desired.
Pressing the MAN SQ Key toggles between the Automatic and Manual Squelch Mode. When in Manual
Squelch, the MAN SQ Annunciator is lit.
In Manual Squelch Mode the VOL/SQ Knob adjusts either the volume or squelch threshold level.
Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob toggles between volume and squelch adjustment. The annunciator at the
bottom of the unit indicates which function the knob is controlling.
In Manual Squelch Mode (‘SQ’ Annunciator at the bottom is lit), the small VOL/SQ Knob controls pilot
squelch threshold. The large VOL/SQ Knob controls copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning either
knob clockwise increases squelch level, counterclockwise decreases squelch level.
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for these inputs can be set above
and below a nominal value. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for adjustment.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These inputs
are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5 mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.
The current ICS isolation mode affects the distribution of the entertainment input MUSIC 1.
MUSIC 1
MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot in COPILOT Mode and in ALL Mode, and can be heard by the copilot
in PILOT Mode and in ALL Mode.
MUSIC 1 MUTING
MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC 1 is always softmuted when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the gradual return of MUSIC
1 to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to return at the headset outputs is
between one-half and four seconds.
MUSIC 1 MUTING ENABLE/DISABLE
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds toggles MUSIC 1 muting ON and OFF.
When toggling, either one or two beeps can be heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled.
MUSIC 2
MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-11
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DATA LINK RECEIVER XM RADIO SYSTEM
When no external entertainment music is connected to the Audio Panel through MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2
jacks, audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously (optional:
requires subscription to XM Audio Service).
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 removes the Data Link Receiver Audio from that
input. For example, if passengers prefer music while the pilot listens to the Data Link Receiver, the entertainment
audio would be connected to the MUSIC 2 jack.
Refer to the Additional Features Section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYBACK
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that plays back up to 2.5 minutes of COM signal
recording. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Audio from the selected COM radio is
recorded and can be played back. Quiet periods between COM reception is not recorded. Anyone able to hear
the selected COM radios is able to hear the COM audio playback.
Once the 2.5 minutes of recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored
memory blocks, starting from the oldest block. Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
The PLAY Key controls the playback function.
• Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block, then returns to normal operation.
• Pressing the PLAY Key again during playback of a memory block plays the preceding recorded block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key will backtrack through the recorded memory blocks to reach and play any
desired block.
• Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during playback halts playback and returns the recorder/playback to normal
operation.
Figure 4-9 Playback Key
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode for both displays. Reversionary Mode
operation displays important flight and engine information on both the PFD and MFD, in case of display failure.
See the System Overview section for more information.
Figure 4-10 Reversionary Mode Button
4-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.3 NAV/COM DESCRIPTION
The NAV/COM Frequency Controls and Boxes are located in the top corners of the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD). The NAV controls and NAV Frequency Box are located on the left side;
the COM controls and COM Frequency Box are on the right.
The NAV/COM interface includes:
• Windows and fields
• Tuning boxes
• Radio status indications
• Radio selection
• Controls
NAV
Controls
• Frequency transfer arrows
NAV Frequency Box
COM Frequency Box
COM
Controls
Figure 4-11 G1000 NAV/COM Interface (PFD)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-13
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
BOXES AND FIELDS
Four NAV and COM Frequency Fields are located in NAV and COM Frequency Boxes at the top of the display
on either side of the Navigation Status Box on both the PFD and the MFD.
• The NAV Frequency Fields are displayed to the left of the Navigation Status Box.
• The COM Frequency Fields are displayed to the right of the Navigation Status Box.
Each radio frequency box is composed of two fields, a standby field and an active field.
• In the NAV Frequency Box, the active frequency is on the right side and the standby frequency is on the
left.
• In the COM Frequency Box, the active frequency is on the left side and the standby frequency is on the
right.
RADIO SELECTION
Frequencies in the active boxes are displayed in either green or white.
• An active COM frequency is displayed in green indicating that the COM radio is selected on the Audio Panel
(COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Keys). White numbers indicate that the radio is not selected. Both active COM
Frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is selected. (PA Mode is selected on the Audio
Panel.)
• An active NAV frequency is displayed in green indicating the NAV radio is selected for navigation on the HSI.
NAV radio selection is made with the PFD CDI Softkey.
- NAV1 selected: a single green arrow with ‘VOR1’ or ‘LOC1’ displayed on the HSI
- NAV2 selected: a double green arrow with ‘VOR2’ or ‘LOC2’ displayed on the HSI
- Both active NAV frequencies displayed in white indicate that GPS is in use
Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Tuning Box
4-14
Selected NAV
Radio
Active NAV
Frequency Field
Navigation Status Box
Selected COM
Radio
Figure 4-12 Frequency Boxes and Fields
Standby COM
Frequency Field
Active COM
Frequency Field
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
Tuning Box
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CONTROLS
The NAV Frequency Box is controlled by knobs and keys on the left, the COM Frequency Box by knobs and
keys on the right.
NAV Controls:
• VOL/PUSH ID Knob
– Turn to adjust the NAV Radio Volume Level
– Press to turn the Morse Code ID ON and OFF
• Frequency Transfer Key
– Press to transfer the NAV frequencies between the standby and active fields
• NAV Tuning Knob
– Turn to tune a NAV frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz, small knob for kHz)
– Press to transfer the NAV Tuning Box between the NAV1 and NAV2 radios
NAV Controls
COM Controls
VOL/PUSH
ID Knob
VOL/PUSH
SQ Knob
Frequency Transfer Keys
NAV
Knob
COM
Knob
Turn to tune desired
frequencies.
Press to change tuning box
positions.
Figure 4-13 NAV/COM Controls
COM Controls:
• VOL/PUSH SQ Knob
– Turn to adjust the COM Radio Volume Level
– Press to turn Automatic Squelch ON and OFF
• Frequency Transfer Key
– Press to transfer the COM frequencies between the active and standby fields
– Press and hold for two seconds to tune the Emergency Frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active COM field
• COM Tuning Knob
– Turn to tune a COM Frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz)
– Press to transfer the COM Tuning Box between the COM1 and COM2 radios
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-15
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TUNING BOX
A light blue tuning box is displayed around the standby frequency fields on both the PFD and MFD. Pressing
the small COM or NAV Knob transfers the tuning box back and forth between the two standby frequency
fields.
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
Frequency Transfer Arrow
Tuning Box
Figure 4-14 Frequency Transfer Arrow and Tuning Box
FREQUENCY TRANSFER ARROW
NOTE: When a COM signal is received or transmitted, the Frequency Transfer Arrow is replaced by a white
RX or TX indication.
The Frequency Transfer Arrow is displayed between the COM and NAV active and standby frequencies for the
active radio. Pressing the Frequency Transfer Key transfers the frequencies. Pressing the small COM or NAV
Knob transfers the frequency tuning box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow between the radios.
Pressing the NAV Frequency
Transfer Key Transfers the NAV
Frequencies.
Pressing the COM Frequency
Transfer Key Transfers the COM
Frequencies.
Figure 4-15 Transferring NAV and COM Frequencies
4-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SWITCHING BETWEEN RADIOS
Pressing the small COM or NAV Knob transfers the tuning box between the upper and lower radio frequency
fields.
When the other COM Transceiver is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM Frequency Tuning Box highlights
the selected frequency on both the PFD and MFD.
When a different NAV radio is selected on the HSI, the NAV Frequency Tuning Field is highlighted in green
on the PFD and MFD. The active NAV frequencies are shown in white when GPS Mode is selected.
Pushing the small NAV Knob
switches the tuning box from one
NAV radio to the other
Pushing the small COM Knob
switches the tuning box from one
COM radio to the other
Figure 4-16 Switching NAV and COM Radios
RADIO INDICATORS
• RX – During COM signal reception, a white ‘RX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
• TX – During COM transmission, a white ‘TX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
• ID – When the Morse Code Identifier is ON for a NAV radio, a white ‘ID’ appears to the left of the active NAV
frequency.
Receive and Transmit
Indications
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 4-17 COM Radio Transmit and NAV Radio ID Indications
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
The Morse Code Identifier
is ON for the GHM VOR
4-17
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VOLUME
Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/PUSH SQ Knob for COM or VOL/
PUSH ID Knob for NAV. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
NAV Volume Level
Remains for Two Seconds
COM Volume Level
Remains for Two Seconds
Figure 4-18 NAV and COM Volume Levels
MANUAL FREQUENCY TUNING
The COM and NAV knobs on the PFD and MFD can be used for manual COM and NAV radio tuning. The
frequencies are tuned in the standby fields.
• The MHz frequency digits are tuned with the large COM and NAV knobs.
• The kHz frequency digits are tuned with the small COM and NAV knobs.
Turning the knobs clockwise increases frequency. Turning the knobs counterclockwise decreases frequency.
COM and NAV frequencies can also be tuned using either the numeric keys or the FMS/NAV-COM Knob
on the MFD/PFD Control Unit (refer to the System Overview for a description of the Control Unit). The FMS/
NAV-COM Knob and the Frequency Transfer Key operate similarly to the controls in the top corners of the
Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD). The COM or NAV Frequency Box selected
for tuning is outlined by a light blue Tuning Selection Box (Figure 4-19). The Tuning Selection Box flashes for
a few seconds to indicate Control Unit tuning activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning
mode results in cancellation of the previous radio tuning mode.
Blue Border
Surrounds COM
Tuning Boxes
Figure 4-19 Frequency Tuning Using the MFD/PFD Control Unit
4-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Tuning a radio frequency with the MFD/PFD Control Unit:
1) Press the NAV or COM Key on the Control Unit to enter a radio tuning mode.
2) Turn the FMS/NAV-COM Knob on the Control Unit to tune a frequency in the desired tuning box (large knob
for MHz; small knob for kHz).
OR:
Press the numeric keys to enter a frequency in the tuning box.
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequencies between the active and standby fields.
4) Press the FMS/NAV-COM Knob to transfer the tuning box between radios.
When using the numeric keys to tune a frequency, at the first key press the first digit of the frequency in the
tuning box is highlighted. Frequencies may then be entered by the digit keys or by a combination of FMS/NAVCOM Knob and numeric keys. While editing the frequency field, the small FMS/NAV-COM Knob can also be
used to change the value of the highlighted digit.
After each key press, the highlighted digit proceeds to the next position (Figure 4-20); the BKSP Key can be
used to back up through the numbers. Rotating the large FMS/NAV-COM Knob also moves the highlighted
digit right or left. Pressing the Decimal Key begins entry of kHz frequency digits.
NAV Frequency
Digit Selected
for Change
Figure 4-20 NAV Frequency Tuning Using the MFD/PFD Control Unit
If an invalid key is pressed, such as a digit out of the frequency band, the blue border blinks for 5 seconds.
Pressing the CLR key removes the frequency entry and displays the previous frequency.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-19
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 COM OPERATION
FREQUENCY SPACING
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25 kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33 kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration.
COM channel spacing is configured through the MFD on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25 kHz Channel
Spacing
8.33 kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-21 8.33 and 25 kHz Spacing
Changing COM Frequency Channel Spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Select 8.33 kHz
or 25.0 kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Figure 4-22 AUX – System Setup Page
4-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
AUX - SYSTEM
SETUP PAGE
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing
reasonable sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/PUSH SQ Knob.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard
over the speaker and phones.
Pressing the VOL/PUSH SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
Pressing the COM VOL Knob turns off
Automatic Squelch. Pressing again
restores Automatic Squelch
Figure 4-23 Overriding Automatic Squelch
SELECTING A COM RADIO
NOTE: When PA Mode is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is no longer lit and the
active COM frequency changes to white, indicating that there is no COM activity.
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel Description for more details on transceiver selection.
The desired COM radio is selected by pressing the COM MIC keys on the Audio Panel. When the COM MIC
Key is annunciated, the associated active COM frequency is displayed in green in the COM Frequency Box.
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
This COM radio is selected
on the Audio Panel.
Figure 4-24 Selecting a COM Radio
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-21
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EMERGENCY FREQUENCY (121.500 MHZ)
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-25 COM Tuning Failure
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the active COM radio (the one with the transfer arrow).
Press for two seconds to
load 121.5 MHz.
Figure 4-26 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel continues to flash as long as the PTT
Key remains stuck.
Figure 4-27 Stuck Microphone Alert
4-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 NAV OPERATION
FREQUENCY RANGE
The NAV radios receive in the VOR/ILS frequency range of 108.00 to 117.95 MHz with 50 kHz spacing. The
NAV Frequency Box displays the following information:
• NAV1 and NAV2 active and standby frequencies
• NAV1 and NAV2 identifier indication (if the Morse Code Identifier is received by the system)
• Color-coded indication of the selected NAV radio
• Morse Code Identifier status
MORSE CODE IDENTIFIER
Press the VOL/PUSH ID Knob to turn the Morse Code Identifier ON and OFF. When the identifier is ON, a
white ‘ID’ indication appears to the left of the active NAV frequency, and the Morse Code Identifier is heard on
the NAV Audio. The VOR/LOC Morse Code Identifier is displayed next to the active NAV frequency.
When the identifier is OFF, the ID indication disappears and the Morse Code is off.
NAV Audio is available with the ID filtered out for listening to HIWAS and FSS transmissions on VOR
stations.
NAV Section of the
Audio Panel
NAV Controls
Press VOL/PUSH ID Knob to
remove VOR/ILS ID Audio. Press
again to listen to Morse Code
NAV2 radio is selected on the Audio
Panel to listen to the GHM VOR
Morse Code Identifier
Figure 4-28 Morse Code Identifier Audio
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-23
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV RADIO SELECTION FOR NAVIGATION
In GPS Mode, both active NAV frequencies are displayed in white. The desired NAV radio is selected for
navigation by selecting the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The three navigation modes that can be selected
are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a single green arrow (shown) labeled either ‘VOR1’ or ‘LOC1’ is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a double green arrow (not shown) labeled either ‘VOR2’ or ‘LOC2’ is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a single magenta arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV radio
is selected.
The NAV radio is
selected by the
CDI Softkey.
Figure 4-29 Selecting a NAV Radio
4-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUTO-TUNING
NOTE: Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of frequencies.
The G1000 System offers multiple auto-tuning capabilities. COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be
auto-tuned from the PFD. The MFD provides auto-tuning of both COM and NAV frequencies from waypoint
and nearest pages. The primary NAV frequency is entered automatically into the Standby NAV Frequency Field
during approach loading or approach activation.
Press the ENT Key to load a
highlighted frequency into
the Frequency Field.
Turn the FMS
Knob to scroll
through a list
of frequencies.
Figure 4-30 Loading Frequencies
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the frequency fields in the following ways:
• By using the ENT Key when the frequency is highlighted on the appropriate page (PFD and MFD).
• When loading or activating an approach (PFD and MFD).
Frequencies loaded from the displays are automatically entered into the COM and NAV standby windows.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-25
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING ON THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports may be viewed and automatically loaded from the Nearest Airports
Window on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the
Frequency Transfer Key places this frequency into the active field.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport:
1) Select the NRST Softkey to open the Nearest Airports Window, which displays the list of airport identifiers and
COM frequencies.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the Standby COM Tuning Field.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the COM frequency between the standby and active frequency
fields.
Selecting the NRST Softkey opens
the Nearest Airports Window
Figure 4-31 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
AUTO-TUNING ON THE MFD
Frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest (ARTCC, FSS, WX) Frequencies
• NRST – Nearest Airports
Selecting a page in the WPT or NRST lists:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
In NAV Mode during any VOR/ILS approach activation, the NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the
standby field of the selected NAV radio.
In GPS Mode during any VOR/ILS approach activation, the appropriate NAV frequency is automatically
loaded into the active field of NAV1.
4-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE
The Airport Information Page displays runway information and a list of frequencies for the selected airport
identifier as well as departure, arrival, and approach information.
Displaying the entire list of frequencies for an airport:
1) On the Airport Information Page, select the INFO Softkey to display runway and frequency information for a
specific airport.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor on the page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airport identifier and press the ENT Key. A list of all available frequencies
for the selected airport appears.
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
Runway
Information
Frequencies
used at KIXD
Airport
Figure 4-32 WPT – Airport Information Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-27
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Loading a COM frequency into the COM tuning box:
1) When the list of frequencies for the selected airport is displayed, highlight the desired frequency by turning the
large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the COM frequencies between the standby and active frequency
fields
The Pilot Controlled Lighting (PCL) frequency, located in the Runways Box of the INFO portion of the
Airport Information Page, may also be highlighted and loaded into the COM Tuning Box.
Loading the primary approach NAV frequency into the NAV Tuning Box:
1) On the Airport Information Page, select the APR Softkey to display approach information for a specific airport.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor in the window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the primary NAV frequency located in the Primary Frequency Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ILS Frequency Loaded
into Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Tower and Ground Control
Frequencies Loaded into COM
Frequency Fields
Figure 4-33 WPT – Approach Information Page (APR)
4-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
WPT – VOR INFORMATION PAGE
NOTE: If the MENU Key is pressed when on the VOR Information Page, the ‘View Recent VOR List’ Menu
Option is displayed for quick access to recently used VORs. If no VOR frequencies have been tuned, this
menu option is grayed out.
The VOR Information Page displays information specific to individual VORs, including the airport that is
nearest to the VOR.
Loading a VOR frequency into the NAV Tuning Box:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor in the VOR Information Page.
2) Turn the FMS Knob as needed to select the desired VOR and press the ENT Key to validate the selection.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the VOR frequency and press the ENT Key to load this frequency into the
standby field of the NAV Frequency Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the NAV frequencies between the standby and active frequency
fields.
VOR Frequency Loaded and
Transferred into Active NAV
Frequency Field
Figure 4-34 WPT – VOR Information Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-29
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS PAGE
The Nearest Airports Page displays a list of the nearest airports with runway, frequency, and approach
information. From this page, any frequency listed for the selected airport can be loaded into the NAV or COM
Frequency Fields.
Displaying the entire list of frequencies for a nearby airport and loading a frequency from that list:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor in the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list of nearest airport identifiers until the desired airport is
highlighted.
3) Select the FREQ Softkey to activate the selection cursor in the Frequencies Window.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list of frequencies for the selected airport.
5) When the desired frequency is highlighted, press the ENT Key to load this frequency into the Standby Tuning
Field of the NAV or COM Frequency Box.
Peach State
Airport Identifier
Airport
and
Runway
Information
Frequency of
GA2 Airport
Approach
Information
Figure 4-35 NRST – Nearest Airports Page
4-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NRST – NEAREST VOR PAGE
The Nearest VOR Page displays a list of VORs with bearing and distance information, plus the VOR
frequency.
Loading a VOR frequency into the Standby NAV Frequency Field:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor on the Nearest VOR Page.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list of nearest VORs until the desired VOR is highlighted.
3) Select the FREQ Softkey to activate the selection cursor in the Frequency Window and press the ENT Key to load
the frequency into the Standby Tuning Field of the NAV Frequency Box.
Nashville VOR
Identifier
VOR
Information
Frequency of
BNA VOR
Figure 4-36 NRST – Nearest VOR Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-31
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NRST – NEAREST FREQUENCIES PAGE
The Nearest Frequencies Page displays a list of nearest ARTCC, FSS, and WX frequencies. For frequency
selection, the cursor can be activated on the ARTCC, FSS, or WX Boxes by using the ARTCC, FSS, and WX
Softkeys.
The Nearest ARTCC and FSS Frequency Pages contain a numbered list of names as well as bearing and
distance information from the transmitting antenna.
Viewing a nearest ARTCC or FSS frequency and loading it into the Standby COM Frequency Field:
1) Select the ARTCC or the FSS Softkey to activate the selection cursor in the Nearest Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through the list of names, then the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired
frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the desired frequency into the COM Tuning Box.
Viewing a nearest WX frequency and loading it into the Standby COM Frequency Field:
1) Select the WX Softkey to activate the selection cursor in the Nearest WX Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load this frequency into the Standby Tuning Field of the COM Frequency Box.
Frequencies of
Nearest ARTCC
Frequencies of
Nearest FSS
Frequencies
of Nearest
Weather
Broadcast
Figure 4-37 NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page
4-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency becomes auto-tuned upon loading an approach.
NOTE: When a VOR/ILS approach has been activated in GPS Mode, and the ILS CDI Capture Option is set to
AUTO, the system switches to NAV Mode as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm from the
FAF). See the GPS Navigation section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation, regardless of
the display unit being used.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency if the desired approach is not already loaded:
1) Press the PROC Key to open the Procedures Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT APPROACH’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Use both the FMS Knob and the ENT Key as needed to select the desired airport, VOR/ILS approach, and
transition.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight either the ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’ prompt and press the ENT Key. The
primary NAV frequency for the activated approach is loaded into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
Selecting an Approach
Loading an Approach
Figure 4-38 Selecting and Loading Approaches
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-33
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
When loading or activating an approach, the primary NAV frequency may be loaded into the NAV Tuning Box
by highlighting the frequency in the Primary Frequencies Box on the PROC – Approach Loading Page using the
FMS Knob, then pressing the ENT Key.
If the system is in GPS Mode when a VOR/ILS approach is loaded or activated, the Approach Primary NAV
Frequency is automatically loaded into the active field of NAV1.
The NAV frequency is also automatically loaded upon vector-to-final activation, if the NAV frequency is not
already loaded in the selected NAV radio. An approach can also be activated with the MENU Key when the
Flight Plan Window is open, or from the Active Flight Plan Page Menu.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency if the desired approach is already loaded:
1) Press the PROC Key to open the Procedures Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key. The
approach primary NAV frequency becomes automatically loaded into the standby field of the selected NAV
radio.
Figure 4-39 Activating an Approach
4-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.7 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
The GTX 33 Transponder is integrated into the G1000 System, offering Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S
interrogation and reply capabilities. This section provides a description of the Transponder operation and
information on Mode S capability.
The Transponder controls are located on the G1000 Primary Flight Display (PFD) on the lower portion of the
screen (see the following figures).
TRANSPONDER SOFTKEYS
Transponder function spans three levels of softkeys: Top-level, Mode Selection, and Code Selection.
When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the following softkeys appear (Figure 4-41): STBY, ON, ALT,
VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
Transponder Data Box
Figure 4-40 Top-Level Softkeys
Selecting XPDR
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Selecting BACK
displays the Toplevel softkeys
Figure 4-41 Mode Selection Softkeys
Selecting CODE
displays the Code
Selection softkeys
Selecting BACK
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Figure 4-42 Code Selection Softkeys
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear (Figure 4-42): 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT,
BKSP, BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the BKSP Softkey backs up code
selection to the previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys (Figure 4-41).
Selecting the BACK Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys (Figure 4-40).
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys
(Figure 4-40).
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-35
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRANSPONDER DATA BOX
The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays a four-digit
code field, a mode field and a reply status indicator. In Standby Mode, both the code field and the mode field
appear in white. In all other modes, these fields appear in green.
MODE S FEATURES
The GTX 33 Transponder is equipped with selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S), capability. Mode S
functions include the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and various ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID reporting – The G1000 Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the aircraft registration
or a FLT ID (Flight Identification). The system is configured for either option by an authorized Garmin
service center.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations.
The purpose of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and Traffic Collision Avoidance System
(TCAS) equipped aircraft to recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
4-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
NOTE: TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in Visual Meteorological Conditions
(VMC).
NOTE: Aircraft without operating transponders are invisible to TIS.
Mode S provides a data link for Traffic Information Service (TIS). TIS is a ground-based service that sends out
location, direction, altitude, and climb/descent information relative to all transponder-equipped aircraft within
a radius of 55 miles from select sites.
For aircraft not equipped with TCAS or TAS, TIS provides a graphic display of traffic information. TIS
displays up to eight traffic targets within 7.5 nautical miles from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the aircraft.
TIS data is updated approximately once every five seconds.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-37
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.8 TRANSPONDER OPERATION
MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
GROUND MODE (AUTOMATIC)
NOTE: Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one of the Mode Selection softkeys.
Ground Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft is on the ground. A green GND indication and
transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the Transponder
does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely
addressed Mode S interrogations.
Figure 4-43 Ground Mode
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the Transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
Figure 4-44 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
Figure 4-45 ON Mode
4-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
Figure 4-46 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
When the Transponder sends replies to interrogations, an ‘R’ indication appears momentarily in the reply
status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Figure 4-47 Reply Indication
CODE SELECTION
ENTERING A CODE
NOTE: When entering a code, select the BKSP (backspace) Softkey to back up and change code digits.
A total of 4096 discrete identification codes can be selected with the Code Selection Softkeys.
Entering a transponder code:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field.
OR:
Use the numeric keys on the MFD/PFD Control Unit to enter the transponder code.
When entering the code, the next digit in sequence must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry
is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the
transponder code becomes active.
Figure 4-48 Entering a Code
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-39
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
VFR CODE
NOTE: The pre-programmed VFR code is set at the factory to 1200.
The VFR code can be entered either manually, each digit at a time, or by selecting the XPDR Softkey,
then the VFR Softkey. When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically
displayed in the code field of the Transponder Data Box.
Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
IMPORTANT CODES
Following is a list of important codes:
• 1200 – VFR code in the U.S. (refer to ICAO standards for VFR codes in other countries)
• 7000 – VFR code commonly used in Europe (refer to ICAO standards)
• 7500 – Hijack code
• 7600 – Loss of communication code
• 7700 – Emergency code
• 7777 – Military interceptor operations code (NEVER SQUAWK THIS CODE)
• 0000 – Code for military use in the U.S.
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends an ID indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes
the aircraft’s own transponder from all others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen.
The IDENT Softkey appears in all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green
IDENT indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
When the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
Figure 4-49 IDENT Indication
4-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section of the Pilot’s Guide provides GPS navigation operating procedures for the G1000 installed in the
Columbia 350/400 aircraft. This section assumes some prior knowledge of the other sections of the G1000 Pilot’s
Guide, especially the “how-to” of entering data and MFD Page Groups. Section 5.13 describes the Navigation
Map Page and gives instructions on map setup, which in most cases is a one-time event. It is recommended that
the user read this section and customize the map before beginning GPS navigation operations. All screenshots
shown in this section are for reference only and are subject to change. This section is organized as follows:
• Direct-to Navigation (MFD)
• Direct-to Navigation (PFD)
• Flight Plans (MFD)
• Flight Plans (PFD)
• Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (MFD)
• Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (PFD)
• Waypoint Page Group (MFD)
• NRST Page Group
• Nearest Airports (PFD)
• Aux Page Group (MFD)
• Vertical Navigation (MFD)
• Navigation Map Configuration (MFD)
• PFD Inset Map and PFD Windows
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-1
GPS NAVIGATION
5.2 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (MFD)
NOTE: The Direct-to Window Inset Map (Figure 5-1) range is adjustable. To change the map range, turn the
Joystick to the left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher range.
The “direct-to” navigation feature provides a quick method of setting a GPS course to a destination waypoint.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to
the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is cancelled or replaced by a
new destination.
Inset Map Showing
Direct-To Waypoint
Location
Direct-to Window
Direct-To Waypoint
Identifier, Facility,
Symbol, City
Direct-to
Course Line
Direct-to
Destination
Waypoint
List of Waypoints and
Twenty-Five Nearest Airports
in Active Flight Plan
Bearing to Waypoint
from Present Position
Position
Distance to Waypoint
from Present Position
Activate Annunciation
Course to Direct-To
Waypoint
Figure 5-1 MFD Direct-to Navigation
SELECTING A DIRECT-TO WAYPOINT
A direct-to waypoint can be selected in the following ways:
• By identifier, facility, or the name of a city
• From the active flight plan or nearest airports list
• From a waypoint field, waypoint page, or highlight shortcut
5-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-2 Entering an Identifier
Selecting a direct-to destination by entering an identifier:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted (Figure 5-2).
2) Enter the destination waypoint identifier. The destination waypoint may be an airport, VOR, NDB, intersection or user
waypoint, as long as it is in the database or stored in memory as a user waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the identifier. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted (Figure 5-3).
4) Press the ENT Key to activate a direct-to course to the selected destination.
Activate Field
Figure 5-3 Activate Field
In addition to selecting a destination by an identifier, the Direct-to Window also allows the selection of
airports, VORs and NDBs by facility or city name (Figure 5-4).
Figure 5-4 Entering a Facility Name
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-3
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a direct-to destination by facility or the name of a city:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the waypoint identifier field highlighted.
2) Highlight the facility or city name field.
3) Enter the facility or city location of the desired waypoint. If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility or city
name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS Knob during the selection process.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate a direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the flight plan can be selected as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to
Window when navigating an active flight plan.
Figure 5-5 Entering a Flight Plan Waypoint
Selecting a direct-to destination from the list of flight plan waypoints:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the waypoint identifier field highlighted.
2) Highlight the flight plan ‘FPL’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan (Figure 5-5).
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to activate a direct-to.
5-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
The Direct-to Window always displays the nearest airports (from the present position) in the FPL/NRST
waypoints field (Figure 5-6).
Figure 5-6 Entering a Nearest Airport
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the nearest airport field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a window showing up to 25 nearby airports.
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired airport.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selected waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to activate a direct-to.
SPECIFYING A COURSE TO A WAYPOINT
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The
course to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to
Window.
Figure 5-7 Entering a Direct-to Course
Manually selecting a direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course (Figure 5-7).
4) Press the ENT Key twice to begin navigation using the selected destination and course.
5) To re-select a direct course from the present position (or select a new manually defined course) press the Directto Key. Press the ENT Key twice.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-5
GPS NAVIGATION
CANCELING DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 provides navigation guidance to the selected destination until the
direct-to is either replaced with a new direct-to or flight plan, cancelled, or when the G1000 is powered off.
Figure 5-8 Cancel Direct-to Message
Canceling a direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted (Figure 5-8), press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000
resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
5-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
DIRECT-TO SHORTCUTS
A direct-to can be performed from any page displaying a single waypoint identifier (such as the Waypoint
pages for airports and NAVAIDS) by simply pressing the Direct-to Key and the ENT Key. For pages that
display a list of waypoints (e.g., the Nearest Airport Page), the desired waypoint must be highlighted with the
cursor before pressing the Direct-to Key.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected from the Navigation Map Page by panning to the desired
destination location, pressing the Direct-to Key, and then the ENT Key twice. If no airport, NAVAID or user
waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically created at
the location of the map pointer.
Bearing and
Distance to
Map Waypoint
(MAPWPT)
Inset Map
MAPWPT displayed
on the Navigation
Map
Direct-to Course
Line
Figure 5-9 Direct-to Navigation Using Map Panning
Selecting a direct-to destination from the Navigation Map Page:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the Joystick to display the map pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the map pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the map pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to navigate to the waypoint.
5) If the map pointer is placed on an open location, press the Direct-to Key.
6) Press the ENT Key twice to create a ‘MAPWPT’ waypoint and then navigate to it (Figure 5-9).
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-7
GPS NAVIGATION
5.3 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (PFD)
NOTE: Section 5.14 describes the PFD Inset Map and PFD Windows. It is recommended that the user read
this section before beginning GPS navigation operations on the PFD.
Waypoint Symbol
Identifier
City, State
Facility Name
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Nearest
Waypoint List
Latitude/Longitude
Bearing From and
Distance to Waypoint
Course to Selected Waypoint
Figure 5-10 Direct-to Window
OPERATIONS
A direct-to waypoint can be selected in the following ways:
• By identifier, waypoint location or facility name
• From a list of waypoints in the active flight plan
• From a list of 25 nearest airports
The PFD Direct-to Window is enabled and disabled by pressing the Direct-to Key. The currently selected
waypoint displays the information shown in Figure 5-10.
Selecting a direct-to by identifier:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Enter the desired waypoint identifier.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
4) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a direct-to by city or facility name:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the city field (to the right of the identifier) or facility field (directly below the identifier) field.
3) Enter the city (to the right of the identifier field) or the facility (directly below the identifier field).
4) Once the desired city or facility name is displayed, press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
5-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a direct-to from a list of waypoints in an active flight plan:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the FPL field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a selection window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan.
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a direct-to from the nearest airports list:
1) Press the Direct-to Key.
2) Highlight the NRST field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a selection window showing the 25 nearest airports.
4) Scroll through the list and highlight the desired airport.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a specific course to a waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key
2) Enter the desired destination waypoint
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘CRS’ field.
5) Enter the desired course
6) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to using the selected course to the destination.
Cancel a direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Direct-to Menu.
3) Press the ENT Key to cancel direct-to navigation. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes navigating the flight plan
along the closest leg of flight.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-9
GPS NAVIGATION
5.4 FLIGHT PLANS (MFD)
Flight planning centers around the three Flight Plan Pages: Flight Plan Catalog, Active Flight Plan, and Vertical
Navigation. The Flight Plan Catalog and Active Flight Plan pages are used to create, edit, and copy flight plans.
The Vertical Navigation Page (described in Section 5.11) is used to create a three-dimensional profile which
provides advisory VNAV information to a final (target) altitude at a specified location. 99 different flight plans
can be created and stored. The flight plan (FPL) page group is selected by pressing the FPL Key.
FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE
Number of Stored
Flight Plans
Number of Flight Plan
Storage Slots Remaining
List of Stored Flight Plan
Titles Ordered by Flight Plan
Number
Destination for Selected
Stored Flight Plan
Departure Point for Selected
Stored Flight Plan
Total Distance for Selected
Stored Flight Plan
Enroute Safe Altitude
Destination for Selected
Stored Flight Plan
Figure 5-11 Flight Plan Catalog Page
Although it is the second page in the flight plan page group, the Flight Plan Catalog Page is often used first
to create and activate a flight plan. Once a flight plan has been activated, the Flight Plan Catalog Page displays
the information shown in Figure 5-11:
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Operations described in this section can be performed using one of three methods:
• Softkeys
• Flight Plan Catalog Page Options Menu
The loaded departure replaces the current departure with the new selection.
The following operations can be performed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page:
• Creating a new flight plan
• Activating a stored flight plan
• Inverting and activating a stored flight plan
• Editing a stored flight plan
• Copying a stored flight plan into another storage slot
5-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
• Deleting a stored flight plan
• Deleting all stored flight plans
• Sorting stored flight plans by comment
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
Creating a new flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, select the NEW Softkey. A blank flight plan page is displayed for the first
empty storage location.
2) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.
5) Once all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to store the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Activating (beginning to navigate) an existing flight plan:
1) With the desired flight plan highlighted, select the ACTIVE Softkey. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window
appears.
2) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a flight plan:
1) Select the INVERT Softkey. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
2) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Editing a flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the EDIT Softkey.
4) To add a waypoint to the flight plan, select the point in the plan where the new waypoint is to be added. If an
existing waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Copying a flight plan to another flight plan catalog location:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the COPY Softkey. A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-11
GPS NAVIGATION
Deleting a flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the flight plan to delete.
3) Select the DELETE Softkey.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key:
MENU OPERATIONS
Figure 5-12 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu
This section describes the operations that are available using the Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu (Figure
5-12). The menu items that are described below are not in order of how they are displayed in the menu list,
but according to typical use.
Creating a new flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A blank flight plan page is displayed for the first empty storage location. Enter the
identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint and press the ENT Key.
6) Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) Once all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to store the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
5-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Once a flight plan is created, it can be activated for navigation using ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
Activating (beginning to navigate) an existing flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the desired flight plan.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) Select ‘Active Flight Plan’.
7) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window appears.
8) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key.
‘Invert & Activate FPL’ allows the active flight plan to be inverted and activated for navigation.
Inverting and activating a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Highlight the desired flight plan.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) Highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’.
7) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
8) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-13
GPS NAVIGATION
‘Edit Flight Plan’ allows the user to edit a stored flight plan.
Editing a flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) To add a waypoint to the flight plan, select the point in the plan where the new waypoint is to be added. If an
existing waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
‘Copy Flight Plan’ copies the active flight plan to a Flight Plan Catalog location. The copy function is useful
for duplicating the active flight plan before making changes.
Copying a flight plan to another flight plan catalog location:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
5-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
‘Delete Flight Plan’ removes all waypoints from the active flight plan. Deleting a flight plan does not delete
the waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory. Once the pilot is
finished with a flight plan, it can easily be deleted from the Flight Plan Catalog Page or the Active Flight Plan
Page.
Deleting a flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the flight plan to delete.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key:
‘Delete All’ removes all flight plans from memory at one time.
Deleting all flight plans:
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
‘Sort by Comment’ sorts flight plans alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to each flight
plan. Procedures on how to enter a comment (flight plan name) are described in the Active Flight Plan Page
section.
Sorting by comment (flight plan name):
1) From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Proceed?’ confirmation window is displayed.
3) With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-15
GPS NAVIGATION
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE
Flight Plan Title
Active Leg
List of Flight Plan Display
Rows for the Flight Plan,
not exceeding 31 items
Flight Plan Distance
Remaining
Active Leg
Information
Flight Plan Total
Distance
Active/Selected leg
Enroute Safe Altitude
Flight Plan Enroute Safe
Altitude
Figure 5-13 Active Flight Plan Page
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for the flight plan currently in use.
Once a flight plan has been activated, the Active Flight Plan Page displays the information shown in Figure 513.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed from the Active Flight Plan Page:
• Changing the flight plan name
• Loading waypoint from the map
• Loading a departure, approach, or arrival procedure
• Activating a selected leg
• Saving the active flight plan
• Inverting and deleting the active flight plan
• Removing an approach, arrival, or departure procedure
• Accessing the Closest Point of Flight Plan Window
• Changing the configurable data fields in the waypoint list
• Restoring default data fields in the waypoint list
• Removing waypoints from the flight plan
• Creating a User Waypoint from the Active Flight Plan Page Map
5-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Changing the flight plan name:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the Flight Plan name field.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to change or edit the name (Figure 5-14).
4) Press the ENT Key. Note that the title only changes on the Active Flight Plan Page, not the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
Figure 5-14 Changing Flight Plan Name
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-17
GPS NAVIGATION
LOAD WAYPOINT
‘Load Waypoint’ allows a waypoint to be added to the flight plan which was selected by panning the
map.
Adding a waypoint to the flight plan which was selected by panning the map:
1) Activate map panning from the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Select a map position.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Highlight ‘Load Waypoint’ from the list (Figure 5-15).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) The new user waypoint is inserted into the flight plan before the waypoint in the list that was previously
highlighted. If nothing is highlighted, it will be placed at the end of the flight plan.
Load Waypoint
Option
Panning Location
Figure 5-15 Load Waypoint from Map Panning
5-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
LOAD DEPARTURE
‘Load Departure’ loads a published departure procedure into a flight plan. It replaces the current departure
with the new selection. When flying a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest airport as a reference when
displaying available departures. A published departure can be loaded into the flight plan using one of three
methods:
• LD DP Softkey
• PROC Key
• Active Flight Plan Page Options Menu
The loaded departure replaces the current departure with the new selection.
Loading a departure procedure using the LD DP Softkey:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, select the LD DP Softkey. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the
‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING’ Page.
2) Select a departure.
3) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
4) Select a runway.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
6) Select a transition.
7) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight
plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-19
GPS NAVIGATION
Loading a departure procedure using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Options Menu is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’ from the list (Figure 5-16).
3) Press the ENT Key. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the ‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page.
4) Select a departure.
5) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
6) Select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
8) Select a transition.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight
plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
Figure 5-16 Selecting a Departure from the Procedures Window
5-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Loading a departure procedure using the Active Flight Plan Page Menu:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the ‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page.
4) Select a departure.
5) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
6) Select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
8) Select a transition.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight
plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-21
GPS NAVIGATION
LOAD APPROACH
‘Load Approach’ selects a published instrument approach for the destination airport. It replaces the
current approach with the new selection. A published approach for the destination airport can be loaded
into the flight plan using one of three methods:
• LD APR Softkey
• PROC Key
• Active Flight Plan Page Options Menu
Destination
Airport
Available
Approaches List
Figure 5-17 Available Approaches for
Destination Airport
Loading an instrument approach using the LD APR Softkey:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, select the LD APR Softkey. The APPROACH window is displayed on the
‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page (Figure 5-17).
2) Select an approach and press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
3) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course).
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared
for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the
approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
5-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
6) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted
(Figure 5-18). Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press
the ENT Key.
Figure 5-18 ‘Not Approved for GPS’ Message
Loading an approach procedure using the PROC Key:
1) From any page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Options Menu is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an approach.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course.)
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared
for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the
approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
9) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the
ENT Key.
Loading an approach procedure using the Active Flight Plan Page Menu:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Approach’
3) Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an approach and press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
5) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course).
6) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-23
GPS NAVIGATION
7) Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for
the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ adds the approach
to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
8) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the
ENT Key.
LOAD ARRIVAL
A published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport can be loaded into the
flight plan using one of three methods:
• LD STAR Softkey
• PROC Key
• Active Flight Plan Page Options Menu
The loaded arrival replaces the current arrival with the new selection.
Available Arrivals
for the Destination
Airport
Figure 5-19 Available Arrivals
Loading an arrival procedure using the LD STAR Softkey:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, select the LD STAR Softkey.
2) The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page (Figure 5-19).
3) Select an arrival.
4) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
5) Select a transition.
6) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
5-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Loading an arrival procedure using the PROC Key:
1) From any page, press the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition.
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
Loading an arrival procedure using the Active Flight Plan Page Menu:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition.
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-25
GPS NAVIGATION
ACTIVATE LEG
Figure 5-20 Activate Leg Command
‘Activate Leg’ selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance). A flight plan along a specific leg can be activated using two possible methods:
• ACT LEG Softkey
• Active Flight Plan Page Options Menu
Activating a flight plan along a specific leg using the ACT LEG Softkey:
1) Highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed (Figure 5-20).
3) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Activating a flight plan along a specific leg using the page menu:
1) Highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Activate Leg’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
5) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
SAVING (STORING) THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Figure 5-21 Store Flight Plan Confirmation Box
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the
instrument procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active
(unless an instrument procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
5-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, departure, or arrival. The active flight plan is erased
when the system is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight
plans with an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current
database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates
the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure is
no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the flight plan and an alert is displayed.
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 5-21). The flight plan is stored in the next available position
in the flight plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INVERTING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
‘Invert Fight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After navigating along a flight plan, the route can be
reversed for navigation guidance back to the original departure waypoint.
Inverting and activating an existing flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’.
5) Press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
‘Delete Flight Plan’ removes all waypoints from the active flight plan. Deleting a flight plan does not delete
the waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory.
Delete a flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan?’ window is displayed (Figure 5-22).
4) Select ‘OK’.
5) Press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-27
GPS NAVIGATION
Figure 5-22 Delete Flight Plan
REMOVING AN APPROACH, ARRIVAL, OR DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
• ‘Remove Departure’ deletes the current DP from the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Arrival’ deletes the current STAR from the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Approach’ deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan.
Removing an approach, arrival, or departure from the active flight plan:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Select the ‘Remove Approach’, ‘Remove Arrival’ or ‘Remove Departure’ option.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Removing an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, select the waypoint that is to be deleted.
2) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the waypoint.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ACCESSING THE CLOSEST POINT OF FLIGHT PLAN WINDOW
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a
reference waypoint. It can also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location
closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Closest Point of FPL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window is displayed with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
4) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) The G1000 displays the location, lat/lon, bearing (BRG), and distance (DIST) to the closest point along the flight
plan from the selected reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan,
highlight ‘LOAD’ and press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the
reference waypoint.
5-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
CHANGING THE CONFIGURABLE DATA FIELDS IN THE WAYPOINT LIST
‘Change Fields’ allows the default fields of DTK (distance) and DIS (distance) to be changed to the
following:
• CUM (cumulative distance)
• DIS (distance)
• DTK (desired track)
• ESA (estimated safe altitude)
• ETA (estimated time of arrival)
• ETE (estimated time enroute)
Changing either the DTK or the DIS field:
1) With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Change Fields’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘DIS’ or ‘DTK’ field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a list of options (Figure 5-23).
6) Select the desired item.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Available
Fields
List
Figure 5-23 Changing Flight Plan Data Fields
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-29
GPS NAVIGATION
Restore Defaults returns the ‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’ fields to ‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’.
Restoring the DTK and DIS fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Removing a waypoint using the CLR Key:
1) With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the identifier for the waypoint to delete.
3) Press the CLR Key to display a confirmation window (Figure 5-24).
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to remove the selected waypoint.
Confirmation
Window
Figure 5-24 Removing a Waypoint
5-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating user waypoints using the Active Flight Plan Page Map:
1) With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is
displayed with the captured position. At this point, the User Waypoint is added to the flight plan list. If a
waypoint in the list is highlighted, the new user waypoint is placed before that waypoint, if there is no highlight,
the new user waypoint is placed at the end of the list.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-31
GPS NAVIGATION
5.5 FLIGHT PLANS (PFD)
Flight planning on the PFD centers around the Flight Plan Window (Figure 5-25) where flight plans can be
created, edited, and activated. The Flight Plan Window is enabled and disabled by pressing the FPL Key.
Flight Plan Title
Desired Track
Leg Distance
Active Leg
Next Available
Memory Position
Figure 5-25 Flight Plan Window
OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed using the Flight Plan Window Menu (Figure 5-26).
• Activate leg
• Store, invert, or delete flight plan
• Load or remove departure, arrival, or approach
• Closest Point of FPL
• Change fields
• Restore defaults
Figure 5-26 Flight Plan Window Menu
5-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
CREATE NEW FLIGHT PLAN
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan can be created and stored in memory.
Creating a new flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. The waypoint field is highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier, city/state. or facility name of the airport/waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the next empty waypoint field.
5) Enter the identifier for each additional waypoint.
6) Press the FPL Key to remove the window.
ACTIVATE LEG
‘Activate Leg’ selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan along a specific leg:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired destination waypoint.
3) Press the MENU Key
4) Highlight ‘Activate Leg’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-33
GPS NAVIGATION
STORE FLIGHT PLAN
The active flight plan is erased when the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated.
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints in the flight plan. If the navigation database is changed
or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an
approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer available, the flight plan becomes “locked” until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan or until the correct navigation database is installed.
Storing a flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window (once all of the waypoints have been entered), press the MENU Key to display the page
menu.
2) Select ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Store Flight Plan Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan in the next available memory slot.
5) Press the ENT Key.
INVERT FLIGHT PLAN
‘Invert Flight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After traveling along a flight plan, the pilot may wish to
reverse the route for navigation back to the original departure point.
Activating an existing flight plan in reverse:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’.
5) Press the ENT Key. The flight plan is now reversed and activated.
5-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
DELETE FLIGHT PLAN
The entire flight plan or selected waypoints within the flight plan may be deleted.
Deleting the entire flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to delete all waypoints in the flight plan.
Deleting selected waypoints in the flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove Waypoint Name?’ window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
LOAD DEPARTURE
‘Load departure’ allows the pilot to select a published standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure
airport. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available
departures.
Selecting a departure for the departure airport:
1) From the Flight Plan Window press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available departures for the departure airport.
4) Select the desired departure.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) A window may appear listing runways for the departure. Select the desired runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The transition window is displayed.
8) Select the desired transition waypoint.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-35
GPS NAVIGATION
LOAD ARRIVAL
‘Load Arrival’ selects a published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport or
replace a current arrival with a new selection.
Selecting an arrival for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available arrivals for the destination airport.
4) Select the desired arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing available transitions for the arrival.
6) Select the desired transition waypoint.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window may appear listing runways for the arrival.
8) Select the desired runway.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
LOAD APPROACH
‘Load Approach’ selects a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replace the current
approach with a new selection.
Selecting an approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Load Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available approaches for the destination airport.
4) Select the desired approach.
5) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the approach.
6) Select the desired transition or vectors.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the approach.
9) To activate the approach, highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.
10) Press the ENT Key.
5-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
REMOVE DEPARTURE
‘Remove Departure’ deletes the current standard instrument departure (SID) from the active flight plan.
REMOVE ARRIVAL
‘Remove Arrival’ deletes the current standard terminal arrival route (STAR) from the active flight plan.
REMOVE APPROACH
‘Remove Approach’ deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan.
Removing a departure, an arrival, or an approach from a direct-to or active flight plan:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Remove Departure’, ‘Remove Arrival’, or ‘Remove Approach’
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window appears listing the procedure that is about to be removed with ‘OK’
highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint. It may also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a
chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
4) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight
plan from the selected reference waypoint.
6) To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan, press the ENT Key. The name for the new
user waypoint is derived from the identifier or the reference waypoint.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-37
GPS NAVIGATION
CHANGE FIELDS
‘Change Fields’ allows the pilot to select the desired data items to be displayed in the Flight Plan Window.
The user-selectable data fields can be changed to display the following information:
• Cumulative Distance (CUM)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Changing a data field in the Flight Plan Window:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Change Fields’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on one of the data fields.
4) Highlight the desired field to be changed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a window with optional data items.
6) Select the desired data item.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
RESTORE DEFAULTS
‘Restore Defaults’ restores all data fields to their default settings.
Restoring default settings for data fields in the Flight Plan Window:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
5-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.6 DEPARTURES, ARRIVALS, AND APPROACHES (MFD)
Options
Approach Procedure
Loaded in Active Flight
Plan
Arrival Loaded in Active
Flight Plan
Departure Procedure
Loaded in Active Flight
Plan
Figure 5-27 Procedures Window
The Procedures Window provides direct access to departures, arrivals, and approaches — based upon the
active flight plan or direct-to destination. In either case, the departure and destination airports must have
published procedures associated with them. There are no softkeys associated with the Procedures Window.
The Procedures Window is displayed by pressing the PROC Key.
The Procedures Window displays the information shown in Figure 5-27.
OPERATIONS
DEPARTURE PROCEDURES
Selecting a departure procedure using the PROC Key:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the ‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page.
4) Select a departure.
5) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
6) Select a runway.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
8) Select a transition.
9) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-39
GPS NAVIGATION
10) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight
plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
11) Highlight the desired transition waypoint.
12) Press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
13) Press the ENT Key. The departure will be active when the flight plan is active.
ARRIVAL PROCEDURES
Selecting an arrival procedure using the PROC Key:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an arrival.
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition.
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan
and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
APPROACH PROCEDURES
Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use. When selecting an approach, a “GPS”
designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver.
Some procedures will not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental
navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate
navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of
ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting
that NAV receiver on the CDI.
5-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Available
Approaches
Approach
Display
Figure 5-28 Selecting an Approach
Selecting an approach procedure using the PROC Key:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.
4) Select an approach (Figure 5-28).
5) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.
6) Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the
approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course.)
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted. ‘Loading’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach
for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the
approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach
to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
9) Press the ENT Key. If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed
with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message and load the approach. To cancel the
approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-41
GPS NAVIGATION
Activating an approach (which was previously loaded):
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ and press the ENT Key.
Another Procedures Window option allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.
Activating the (previously loaded) approach, with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “Load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to
the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’
— which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active. Otherwise, activate the full approach using
the ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ option.
5-42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.7 DEPARTURES, ARRIVALS, AND APPROACHES (PFD)
The Procedures Window (Figure 5-29) provides direct access to departures, arrivals and approaches — based
upon the active flight plan or direct-to destination. In either case, the departure and destination airports must
have published procedures associated with them. The Procedures Window is displayed and removed by pressing
the PROC Key.
OPERATIONS
Figure 5-29 Procedures Window Operations
The following operations can be performed from the Procedures Window:
• Activate Vector-To-Final or approach
• Select approach, arrival, or departure
SELECT DEPARTURE
‘Select Departure’ selects a published standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure airport or
replaces the current departure with a new selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest
airport as a reference when displaying available departures.
Available
Runways
Available
Departures
Available
Transitions
Figure 5-30 Selecting a Departure
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-43
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a departure for the departure airport:
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the departure field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired departure.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the departure.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the departure.
10) Select the desired runway.
11) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the departure.
SELECT ARRIVAL
‘SELECT ARRIVAL’ selects a published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport or
replaces a current arrival with a new selection.
Available
Transitions
Available
Arrivals
Figure 5-31 Selecting an Arrival
Selecting an arrival for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the arrival field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired arrival.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the arrival.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the arrival.
5-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
10) Select the desired runway.
11) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the arrival.
SELECT APPROACH
‘SELECT APPROACH’ selects a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replaces the
current approach with a new selection.
Available
Approaches
Available
Transitions
Figure 5-32 Selecting an Approach
Selecting an approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport (Figure 5-32):
1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.
5) Press the ENT Key until the approach field is highlighted.
6) Select the desired approach.
7) Press the ENT Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the approach.
8) Select the desired transition or vectors.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to load the approach OR to activate the approach, highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.
NOTE: If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the
ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-45
GPS NAVIGATION
ACTIVATE APPROACH
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ activates the approach.
Figure 5-33 Activate Approach Selection
Activating the approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:
1) From the Flight Plan Window, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL
‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.
Figure 5-34 Activate Vector-To-Final Selection
Activating the approach with vectors to final:
1) From an active flight plan, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures options window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
5-46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.8 WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP (MFD)
The waypoint pages provide information for thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections, runways,
frequencies, and procedures. In addition, a user waypoint information page displays information for up to 1,000
user-created waypoints. The Waypoint Page Group consists of the following pages:
• WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION
• WPT – INTERSECTION INFORMATION
• WPT – NDB INFORMATION
• WPT – VOR INFORMATION
• WPT – USER WPT INFORMATION
Selecting any waypoint page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group. ‘WPT’ appears in the page group icon located in
the lower right corner of the display.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-47
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION
Identifier
Region
Facility Name
Location
Fuel Type
Available
Position
UTC Time Zone
Information
Elevation
Runway
Information
Communication
and Navigation
Frequencies
Figure 5-35 Airport Information Page
The Airport Information Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-35.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Airport Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Select the INFO Softkey.
Selecting an airport by identifier, facility name, or city location:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the identifier, facility name or city location field (Figure 5-36).
3) Enter the desired identifier, facility name, or city location.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
5-48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS
As an identifier, facility name or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through
the database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. If
duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a
duplicate waypoint appears once you select the identifier (Figure 5-37).
Figure 5-37 Duplicate Waypoints
Loading a frequency in the standby COM or NAV Frequency Box:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the box labeled ‘Frequencies’.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list, placing the cursor on the desired frequency. If a listed frequency
has additional information for the pilot to view, the frequency is preceded by an info (‘i’) designation. Press the
ENT Key to view the information. The following may be displayed with the frequency:
• ‘TX’ – transmit only
• ‘RX’ – receive only
• ‘PT’ – part time frequency
• ‘i’ – additional information exists, press the ENT Key
4) Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or NAV Frequency Box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-49
GPS NAVIGATION
The Airport Frequencies field uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in Table 5-1:
Communication
Frequencies Which
May Include Additional
Information
Approach
Arrival
Class B
Class C
CAT
Departure
TMA
Terminal
TRSA
Communication Frequencies
Without Additional
Information
Navigation
Frequencies
ATIS
ASOS
AWOS
Center
Clearance
Gate
Control
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Pre-Taxi
Radar
Ramp
Other
Tower
Unicom
ILS
LOC
Table 5-1 Frequency Descriptions and Abbreviations
Figure 5-38 Viewing a Restriction
5-50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Loading a pilot control lighting frequency into selected COM standby frequency:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the ‘PCL FREQ’ field in the Runways Box.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the PCL frequency in the standby field of the COM Frequency Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL AIRPORT RUNWAY INFORMATION
Runway Designation
Runway Size
Runway Surface
Runway Lighting
Figure 5-39 Runway Information Box
The airport runway information field (Figure 5-39) displays runway designations, length, surface type and
lighting for the selected airport. A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on
the Airport Information Window. The map image range is displayed in the lower left corner and is adjustable
using the Joystick. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.
Displaying information for each additional runway:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Place the cursor on the runway designation field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the next runways for the selected airport.
4) Select the desired runway.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
6) Turn the Joystick counterclockwise to select a lower range and rotate it clockwise to select a higher range.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the airport runway information box:
• Type – Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Surface – Runway surface types include: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Lighting – Runway lighting types include: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or Frequency (for
pilot-controlled lighting)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-51
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Place the cursor on the ‘RUNWAYS’ identifier field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the next runway for the selected airport. Continue turning the small FMS
Knob to select the desired runway.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
The following softkey operations are available from the Airport Information Page:
MAP – Select to enable the map features for the Airport Information Map.
INFO – Select to display the Airport Information Page.
DP – Select to display the Airport Departure Page.
STAR– Select to display the Arrival Information Page.
APR – Select to display the Approach Information Page.
WX – Select to display the Weather Information Page.
MENU OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed from the options menu for the various airport pages:
Loading a departure:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Window is displayed. The departure procedure is displayed as part of
the overall flight plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
Loading an arrival:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Window is displayed. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the
overall flight plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
5-52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Loading and activating an approach:
1) Select the Approach Information Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load & Activate Approach’
4) Press the ENT Key. The approach is added to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
Loading an approach:
1) Select the Approach Information Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Approach’
4) Press the ENT Key. The approach is added to the flight plan.
Viewing a departure airport:
1) Select any Airport Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Airport Window is displayed.
Viewing a recent airport list:
1) Select any Airport Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Recent Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A list containing the most recent 16 airports is displayed.
5) Select an airport.
6) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page for the selected airport is displayed.
Viewing info:
1) Select the Departure, Arrival, or Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Info’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page is displayed.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-53
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing a departure:
1) Select the Departure, Arrival, or Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed..
Viewing arrival:
1) Select the Information. Departure, or Approach Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Information Page is displayed.
Viewing approach:
1) Select the Information, Departure, or Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Approach’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Approach Information Page is displayed.
Viewing weather:
1) Select any Airport Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Weather’.
4) The Weather Information Page is displayed.
OTHER OPERATIONS
From the Airport Information Page Map the pilot can create user waypoints.
Creating user waypoints via the Airport Information Page Map:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the center of the map.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT – DEPARTURE INFORMATION
NOTE: ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway field, indicating the departure procedure applies to all runways.
For airports with parallel runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the
departure procedure applies to both runways
Identifier
Facility Name
Location
Available
Departures
Available
Transitions
List of Legs
in Departure
Sequence
Map Showing
Selected
Departure
Figure 5-40 Departure Information Page
The Departure Information Page (Figure 5-40) shows the available departure procedures (DPs, also referred
to as SIDs) for the selected airport. Where multiple runways or transitions are associated with the departure
procedure, that information can also be displayed. A map image provides a layout diagram for each departure,
runway, and transition.
The Departure Information page displays the following information about a selected airport:
• Map showing the selected departure
• Associated airport identifier
• Airport symbol
• Airport usage (e.g., private, public, military, heliport)
• Facility name
• Airport location (e.g. city, state)
• Available departures
• Runways served by the selected departure
• Available transitions for the selected departure and runway
• List of legs in the departure sequence including:
• Leg starting waypoint
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-55
GPS NAVIGATION
•Leg desired track
•Leg distance
Selecting the Departure Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Select the DP Softkey.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Departure Airport:
1) With the Departure Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the identifier, facility name or city location field.
3) Enter the desired information.
4) Press the ENT Key until the DEPARTURE window is displayed.
6) Select a departure.
7) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
8) Select a runway.
9) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
10) Select a transition.
11) Press the ENT Key. The departure is now ready to load.
12) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
The following softkey operations are available from the Departure Information Page:
INFO – Select to display the Airport Information Page.
DP – Select to display the Airport Departure Page.
STAR – Select to display the Arrival Information Page.
APR – Select to display the Approach Information Page.
WX – Select to display the Weather Information Page.
5-56
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
MENU OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed using the Departure Information Page Options Menu:
Loading a departure:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the
overall flight plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.
Viewing departure airport:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Airport Page is displayed.
Viewing recent airport list:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Recent Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A list containing the most recent 16 airports is displayed.
5) Select an airport.
6) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information page for the selected airport is displayed.
Viewing info:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Info’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page is displayed..
Viewing arrival:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Information Page is displayed.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-57
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing approach:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Approach’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Approach Information Page is displayed.
Viewing weather:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Weather’.
4) The Weather Information Page is displayed.
OTHER OPERATIONS
From the Departure Information Page Map the pilot can create user waypoints and access the checklist if
one is installed.
Creating user waypoints using the Departure Information Page Map:
1) With the Departure Information Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT – ARRIVAL INFORMATION
Facility Name
Associated
Airport Identifier
Airport Symbol
Airport
Usage
Airport
Location
Available
Arrivals
Available
Transitions
Map Showing
Selected Arrival
List of Legs in
Arrival
Sequence
Runways Served by the
Selected Arrival and
Transition
Leg Desired
Track
Leg Starting
Point
Leg Distance
Figure 5-41 Arrival Information Page
The Arrival Information Page shows the available Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) procedures for a selected
airport. Where multiple transitions or runways are associated with the arrival procedure, that information is
also displayed. A map image provides a layout diagram for each arrival, transition, and runway.
The Arrival Information page displays the information described in Figure 5-40.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Arrival Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Select the STAR Softkey.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-59
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting the Arrival Airport:
1) With the Arrival Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the identifier, facility name or city location field.
3) Enter the desired information.
4) Press the ENT Key until the Arrival window is displayed.
5) Select an arrival.
6) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
7) Select a transition.
8) Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.
9) Select a runway.
10) Press the ENT Key. The departure is now ready to load.
11) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
The following softkey operations are available from the Arrival Information Page:
INFO – Select to display the Airport Information Page
DP – Select to display the Airport Departure Page
STAR– Select to display the Arrival Information Page
APR – Select to display the Approach Information Page
WX – Select to display the Weather Information Page
MENU OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed using the Arrival Information Page Options Menu:
Loading an arrival:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the
overall flight plan and is placed after the enroute flight plan.
5-60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing arrival airport:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Arrival Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Airport Page is displayed.
Viewing recent airport list:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Recent Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A list containing the most recent 16 airports is displayed.
5) Select an airport.
6) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information page for the selected airport is displayed.
Viewing info:
1) Select the Departure Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Info’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page is displayed.
Viewing departure:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-61
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing approach:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Approach’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Approach Information Page is displayed.
Viewing weather:
1) Select the Arrival Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Weather’.
4) The Weather Information Page is displayed.
OTHER OPERATIONS
From the Arrival Information Page Map the pilot can create user waypoints.
Creating user waypoints using the Arrival Information Page Map:
1) With the Arrival Information Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the center of the map.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT – APPROACH INFORMATION
NOTE: Approaches must be activated before they can be navigated in the active flight plan.
Facility Name
Associated
Airport Identifier
Airport Symbol
Airport
Usage
Airport
Location
Available
Approaches
Available
Transitions
Primary NAVAID ID
and Frequency for the
Selected Approach and
Transition
Map Showing
Selected
Approach
Leg Starting
Waypoint
Leg Distance
Leg Desired
Track
Figure 5-42 Approach Information Page
The Approach Information Page (Figure 5-42) shows the available approach procedures for a selected airport.
Where multiple initial approach fixes (IAFs) and feeder routes are available, that information may also be
displayed. A map image provides a layout diagram for each approach and transition. Not all approaches in
the database are approved for GPS use. When an approach is selected, a GPS designation to the right of the
procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have
this designation, meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. VOR
approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the
NAV receiver to the HSI located on the PFD.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Approach Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Select the APR Softkey.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-63
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting the approach airport:
1) With the Approach Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the identifier, facility name or city location field.
3) Enter the desired information.
4) Press the ENT Key until the Approach window is displayed.
6) Select an approach.
7) Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.
10) Select a transition.
11) Press the ENT Key. The approach is now ready to load.
12) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
The following softkey operations are available from the Approach Information Page:
INFO – Select to display the Airport Information Page.
DP – Select to display the Airport Departure Page.
STAR– Select to display the Arrival Information Page.
APR – Select to display the Approach Information Page.
WX – Select to display the Weather Information Page.
MENU OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed using the Approach Information Page Options Menu:
Loading and activating an approach:
1) Select the Approach Information Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load & Activate Approach’
4) Press the ENT Key. The approach is added to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
Loading an approach:
1) Select the Approach Information Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Load Approach’
4) Press the ENT Key. The approach is added to the flight plan.
5-64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing departure airport:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Airport Page is displayed.
Viewing destination airport:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Destination Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Destination Airport Page is displayed.
Viewing recent airport list:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Recent Airport’.
4) Press the ENT Key. A list containing the most recent 16 airports is displayed.
5) Select an airport.
6) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information page for the selected airport is displayed.
Viewing info:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Info’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page is displayed.
Viewing departure:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Departure’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-65
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing arrival:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Arrival’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Information Page is displayed.
Viewing weather:
1) Select the Approach Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘View Weather’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is displayed.
5-66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT – WEATHER INFORMATION
Associated
Airport Identifier
Airport Symbol
Airport
Usage
Facility Name
Airport Identifier
Airport Location
METAR Information
for the Selected
Airport
Map of
Surrounding Area
and Selected
Airport
TAF Information
for the Selected
Airport
Figure 5-43 Weather Information Page
The Weather Information Page displays the information described in Figure 5-43. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance
Section for detailed information relating to the display and control of optional weather information.
OPERATIONS
Viewing the Weather Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
3) Press the WX Softkey.
OR:
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘View Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-67
GPS NAVIGATION
User waypoints can be created from the Weather Information Page Map.
Creating user waypoints using the Weather Information Page Map:
1) With the Weather Information Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target
pointer is displayed at the center of the map.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is
highlighted.
4) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT - INTERSECTION INFORMATION
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
Intersection Identifier
and Symbol
Intersection General
Location and Position
Map of
Surrounding
Area
Nearest VOR Information;
Identifier, Symbol, Radial
Angle, and Distance
Intersection
Symbol
Figure 5-44 Intersection Information Page
The Intersection Information Page displays the information in Figure 5-44:
OPERATIONS
To change the map range, turn the Joystick to the left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select
a higher range. Intersections can only be selected by identifier.
Selecting the Intersection Information Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the second rectangular page icon.
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a name for the identifier.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-69
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing recent intersections list:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select an Intersection from the list (16 maximum are listed).
3) Press the ENT Key to view the selected Intersection.
List of Recent
Intersections
Figure 5-45 Recent Intersection List
5-70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT - NDB INFORMATION
NDB Identifier
NDB Symbol
NDB Name
Nearest City
General Location
NDB Frequency
NDB Symbol
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing, distance
Figure 5-46 NDB Information Page
The NDB Information Page displays the information shown on figure 5-46:
OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed from the NDB Information Page:
• NDB selection by identifier
• NDB selection by name
• NDB selection by city
Selecting the NDB Information Page
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the third rectangular page icon
Selecting a specific NDB
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name or closest city).
3) Enter an identifier, name or city.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-71
GPS NAVIGATION
If duplicate identifiers occur, a Duplicate Waypoints Menu pops up, from which the desired waypoint can
be selected. When scrolling through the closest cites list to select an NDB, a city may appear more than once,
depending on the number of NDBs near it.
The following option is available by pressing the MENU Key (with the NDB Information Page displayed):
• ‘View Recent NDB List’ which displays the most recent NDB list.
Viewing the most recent NDB list:
1) Select the NDB Information Page and press the MENU Key. ‘View Recent NDB List’ is highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Select an NDB from the list (16 maximum are listed).
4) Press the ENT Key. The selected NDB is now the active NDB.
List of Recent
NDBs
Figure 5-47 Recent NDB List
5-72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT - VOR INFORMATION
Identifier
VOR Symbol
Nearest City
Magnetic Variation at
VOR location
Name
VOR Class
General Location
Position Field
Latitude/Longitude
Frequency
Map of Surrounding
Area
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Figure 5-48 VOR Information Page
The VOR Information Page displays the information shown in figure 5-47.:
OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed from the VOR Information Page:
• VOR selection by identifier
• VOR selection by name
• VOR selection by city
• Loading of frequency into standby navigation frequencies
Selecting the VOR Information Page
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the fourth rectangular page icon.
Selecting a VOR
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name or closest city).
3) Enter an identifier, name or city.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-73
GPS NAVIGATION
The following options are available by pressing the MENU Key (with the VOR Information Page
displayed):
• ‘View Recent VOR List’ which displays the most recent VOR list.
Viewing the most recent VOR list:
1) Select the VOR Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. ‘View Recent VOR List is highlighted’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Select a VOR from the list (16 maximum are listed).
5) Press the ENT Key. The selected VOR is now the active user VOR.
List of Recent
VORs
Figure 5-49 Recent VOR List
5-74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WPT - USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION
User Waypoint
Symbol
Comment
User Waypoint
Name and Symbol
General Location
Latitude/Longitude
Second Reference
Waypoint with
Identifier and
Bearing
Reference
Waypoints
User Waypoint
List with
Comments
Map of
Surrounding Area
Number of
Waypoint Slots
Used/Available
Figure 5-50 User WPT Information Page
The G1000 allows the storage of up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. The User Waypoint Information Page
(Figure 5-50) displays the waypoint name (up to six characters long), identifier, and radial from two reference
waypoints, distance from one reference waypoint, along with the user waypoints latitude/longitude position.
The User Waypoint Information Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-50:
OPERATIONS
The following operations can be performed from the User Waypoint Information Page:
• Creating user waypoints (by current location, entered latitude/longitude position, reference waypoint
specifications, or map pointer location)
• Modifying user waypoint information (by comment, latitude/longitude position, or reference waypoint
information)
• Renaming user waypoints
• Deleting user waypoints
Selecting the User Waypoint Information Page
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the fifth rectangular page icon.
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint Information Page or the Navigation Map Page.
To create a new user waypoint from the User Waypoint Information Page, enter the name (identifier) and
position, or reference another waypoint by radial and distance.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-75
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating a new user waypoint
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a name for the new waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the latitude/longitude field or the Reference Waypoints field, depending on how the waypoint is to be
defined.
6) Enter the position coordinates or the radial and distance from the reference waypoint.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from the Navigation Map Page
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The target pointer
is displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a user waypoint
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to make changes.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting a user waypoint
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Information Page Options or select the DELETE Softkey.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is displayed.
5) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5-76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
MENU OPERATIONS
The following options are available by pressing the MENU Key (with the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed):
• Delete All User Waypoints
• View Recent User WPT List
• Use Present Position
• Auto Comment
• Create New User Waypoint
• Delete User Waypoint
• Rename User Waypoint
‘Delete All User Waypoints’ deletes all user waypoints from memory.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’
4) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation windows is displayed.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept ‘YES’ or highlight ‘NO’.
6) Press the ENT Key.
‘View Recent User WPT List’ displays the most recent user waypoint list.
Viewing the most recent user waypoint list:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Information Page Menu.
3) Select ‘View Recent User WPT List’.
4) Press the ENT Key. Select a waypoint from the list (16 maximum are listed).
5) Press the ENT Key. The selected waypoint is now the active user waypoint.
‘Present Position’ when selected will move the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of
the aircraft. The user waypoint is set to the airplane’s position at the time when the option was selected.
Moving the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of the aircraft:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page and press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the position and press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-77
GPS NAVIGATION
‘Auto Comment’, when selected, will overwrite the currently selected user waypoint comment with an
automatically generated comment. Auto comments are in the same format as comments that are generated
for user waypoints that have not specified unique user waypoint comments. The auto comment can be one
of three styles:
• REF1BRG1/DIS1 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and distance
(this is generally the default case, but the default case could also be the blank case if there are no reference
waypoints near the user waypoints position.
• REF1BRG1/REF2BRG2 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and a
reference 2 waypoint radial
• BLANK - if no reference waypoints are near the user waypoints position
Overwriting the currently selected user waypoint’s comment with an automatically generated
comment:
1) Select the desired waypoint on the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. Select ‘Auto Comment’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
‘Create New Waypoint’ creates a new user waypoint and ‘Delete User Waypoint’ deletes a user waypoint.
Deleting a user waypoint:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (select ‘Delete User Waypoint’ and press the ENT Key) or select the DELETE Softkey.
3) The message ‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to delete the waypoint.
‘Rename User Waypoint’ renames a user waypoint.
Renaming a user waypoint:
1) Select the User Waypoint Information Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (select ‘Rename User Waypoint’ and press the ENT Key) or select the RENAME Softkey.
3) The user waypoint field is highlighted. Rename the user waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) The message ‘Would you like to rename the user waypoint’ is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to rename the new user
waypoint.
5-78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.9 NRST PAGE GROUP
The Nearest Page Group consists of the following pages:
• NRST - NEAREST AIRPORTS
• NRST - NEAREST INTERSECTIONS
• NRST - NEAREST NDB
• NRST - NEAREST VOR
• NRST - NEAREST USER WPTS
• NRST - NEAREST FREQUENCIES
• NRST - NEAREST AIRSPACES
Selecting any nearest page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group. ‘NRST’ appears in the page group icon located in
the lower right corner of the display.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest page.
NRST - NEAREST AIRPORTS
NOTE: If there are no Nearest Airports
available, a text “NONE WITHIN
200NM” is displayed.
Airport Identifier, Symbol, Bearing to
the Airport from Current Position, and
Distance (up to 25 airports within 200
nm of the current position)
Map of Surrounding Area
Airport Name,
Closest City, Elevation
Length of Longest
Hard Surface
Runway (or soft
surface, if no hard
surface runway
exists)
Primary
Communications
Frequency and Type
Most Precise Approaches
Available
Nearest Airport Displayed
on Map
Figure 5-51 Nearest Airports Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-79
GPS NAVIGATION
The Nearest Airports Page (Figure 5-50) displays detailed information for five nearest airports, with a scroll
bar along the right-hand side of the page indicating the part of the list that is currently being viewed. Not all 25
nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections, or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding Nearest
Page at one time. The Nearest Airspaces Page displays detailed information for up to 3 special use or controlled
airspace alerts. The NRST pages for VORs, NDBs, intersections, and user waypoints display eleven waypoints
at a time.
The Nearest Airports Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-51 for a selected airport.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest Airports Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon.
Selecting a nearest airport:
1) With the Nearest Airport Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired nearest airport.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
Accessing information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the APT Softkey or press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in
the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ field. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Highlight the desired airport.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Accessing runway information for the selected airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the RNWY Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ field.
2) Select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Quickly tuning the COM transceiver to a nearby airport frequency:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘FREQUENCIES’
field.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency tuning box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to place the frequency in the active field.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting and loading an approach from the Nearest Airports Page:
1) Select the desired nearest airport.
2) Select the APR Softkey located at the bottom of the display. The LD APR (load approach) Softkey becomes
available.
3) Select the desired approach.
4) Select the LD APR Softkey. The Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
5) Select the desired transition.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the approach. If navigating a flight plan previous to loading this approach, the G1000
will continue navigating the flight plan until the approach is activated.
8) Highlight the ‘ACTIVATE’ field.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach and begin navigating to the IAP.
10) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message (or select ‘NO’).
11) Press the ENT Key to return to the Approach Loading Page.
MENU OPERATIONS
Figure 5-52 Nearest Airport Page Menu
Accessing information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key (Figure 5-52).
2) Select ‘Select Airport Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ field.
3) Highlight the desired airport.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-81
GPS NAVIGATION
Accessing runway information for the selected airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select Runway Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ field.
3) Select the desired runway.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Quickly tuning the COM transceiver to a nearby airport frequency:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select Frequency Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘FREQUENCIES’ field
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key. The selected frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency tuning box.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to place the frequency in the active field.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting and Loading an approach from the Nearest Airports Page:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select Approach Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘APPROACHES’ field. The
LD APR (load approach) Softkey becomes available.
3) Select the desired approach.
4) Select the LD APR Softkey. The Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
5) Select the desired transition.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the approach. If navigating a flight plan previous to loading this approach, the G1000
will continue navigating the flight plan until the approach is activated.
8) Highlight the ‘ACTIVATE’ field.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach and begin navigating to the IAP.
10) If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’
highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message (or select ‘NO’).
11) Press the ENT Key to return to the Nearest Airports Page.
5-82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST INTERSECTIONS
Nearest
Intersection
Symbol
Intersection
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
(within 200 nm of
current position)
Latitude and
Longitude
Map of
Surrounding Area
Reference VOR
Name,
Symbol, Frequency,
Bearing, Distance
Figure 5-53 Nearest Intersections Page
The Nearest Intersections Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-53 for a selected intersection.
OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest Intersections Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page group icon located in
the lower right corner of the display.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the second rectangular page icon.
Selecting a nearest intersection from the Nearest Intersections Page:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the desired intersection. The remaining information on the Nearest intersection Page pertains to the
selected intersection.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-83
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST NDB
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance (within
200 nm of current
position)
NDB Name
Map of
Surrounding Area
Latitude and
Longitude
Frequency
Nearest
NDB Map
Symbology
Figure 5-53 Nearest NDB Page
The Nearest NDB Page displays the information shown in figure 5-54 for a selected NDB.
OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest NDB Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page group icon located in
the lower right corner of the display.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the third rectangular page icon.
Selecting an NDB from the Nearest NDB Page:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select the desired NDB. The information on the Nearest NDB Page pertains to the selected NDB.
5-84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST VOR
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance (within
200 nm of current
position)
Nearest
VOR
Symbol
Map of
Surrounding Area
Reference VOR
Name,
Closest City, Type,
Mag Variation,
Position
Selected VOR
Frequency
Figure 5-55 Nearest VOR Page
The VOR Information Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-54 for a selected VOR.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest VOR Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the fourth rectangular page icon.
Selecting a nearest VOR:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired nearest VOR.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
Viewing information for the nearest VOR
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, select the VOR Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST VOR’ box.
2)
Turn the FMS Knob to select a VOR.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-85
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting and loading a VOR frequency:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, select the FREQ Softkey to highlight the VOR frequency in the ‘FREQUENCY’
field.
2) Press the ENT Key. The selected VOR frequency is placed in the NAV standby frequency box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MENU OPERATIONS
Figure 5-56 Nearest VOR Page Menu
Accessing information for a specific VOR:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key (Figure 5-56).
2) Select ‘Select VOR Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST VOR’ field.
3) Highlight the desired VOR.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Accessing frequency information for the selected VOR:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select Frequency Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘FREQUENCY’ field.
3) Select the desired frequency.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST USER WAYPOINT
Identifier, Symbol, Bearing,
and Distance to the User
Waypoint from the current
position (within 200 nm)
Nearest
User Waypoint
Symbol
User Comment and Location
(latitude and longitude) 200 nm)
Reference Waypoints
(see text)
Figure 5-57 Nearest User Waypoint Page
The User Waypoint Page (Figure 5-57) displays a list of up to the 25 nearest user waypoints that are within
200 nm. Each list item includes the identifier, icon, bearing and distance to the user waypoint from the current
position. An arrow before the identifier indicates the selected user waypoint.
Up to eleven user waypoints are visible at a time. If more than eleven are available, there is an indication that
the list can be scrolled down and/or up. If less than eleven the unused area matches the background color and
the scroll bar is not be visible. If there are no user waypoints in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest
user waypoints is displayed.
Information about the selected user waypoint includes the user comment and location (latitude and longitude).
If there are no user waypoints, the user comment is blank and the position data is dashed.
Reference Waypoints for the selected user waypoint are those specified when the user waypoint was created.
If there is only one valid reference waypoint, the bearing and distance from the reference waypoint is stated
and the second reference waypoint information is dashed. If there are no user waypoints or no valid reference
waypoints, the reference waypoint fields are dashed.
If there are two valid reference waypoints, the bearings from the reference waypoints are stated and the first
reference waypoint’s distance field is dashed.
A map of the currently selected user waypoint and surrounding data is displayed which at a minimum shows
the selected user waypoint and the current aircraft position. A line is drawn between the current position and
the selected user waypoint.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-87
GPS NAVIGATION
OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest User Waypoint Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the fifth rectangular page icon.
Selecting a nearest user waypoint:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. If any previously
entered User Waypoints are within 200 nm, these will be displayed with the closest listed first.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired waypoint. The remaining information on the Nearest User Waypoint
Page pertains to the selected nearest user waypoint.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST FREQUENCIES
Nearest ARTCC
Nearest FSS
Nearest
ARTCC
Nearest WX
Figure 5-58 Nearest Frequencies Page
The Nearest Frequencies Page (Figure 5-58) displays a list of nearest ARTCCs. Only one ARTCC in the list
is viewable at any given time and the user is able to change the currently viewed ARTCC. For each ARTCC the
bearing, distance, and relevant frequencies are displayed. If there are more than two frequencies for any ARTCC
then they are displayed inside of a scrollable list box with only two visible at any given time.
A list of nearest FSSs is displayed with only one FSS in the list viewable at any given time and the user is able
to change the currently viewed FSS. For each FSS the bearing, distance, and relevant frequencies are displayed.
If there is a NAV frequency for the given FSS then it is displayed in the list with its corresponding identifier so
as to differentiate it from COM frequencies. If there are more than two frequencies of any type for a certain FSS
then they are displayed inside of a scrollable list box with only two visible at any given time.
A list of nearest weather stations is displayed in a scrollable list box with a maximum of eight stations viewable
at any time. Each line displays the call letters, type, and frequency of the given weather station.
A map of the currently selected item (ARTCC, FSS or weather station) and surrounding data, is displayed with
a line between it and the current position. If there is no database loaded or if there are no stations in range, then
any or all of the lists may be empty with the display indicating as such.
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the sixth rectangular page icon.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-89
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a nearest ARTCC and Frequency:
1) With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest ARTCC.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired ARTCC frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
Selecting a nearest ARTCC and frequency
1) With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, select the ARTCC Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST ARTCC’
box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest ARTCC.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired ARTCC frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
Selecting a nearest FSS and frequency,
1) With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, select the FSS Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST FSS’ box.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest FSS.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired FSS frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
Selecting a nearest weather frequency:
1) With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, select the WX Softkey to highlight the frequency in the ‘WX
FREQUENCY’ field.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired weather frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected weather frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5-90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
MENU OPERATIONS
Figure 5-59 Nearest Frequencies Page Menu
Selecting a nearest ARTCC and frequency
1) With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, press the MENU Key (Figure 5-59).
2) Select ‘Select ARTCC Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST ARTCC’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest ARTCC.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired ARTCC frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
Selecting and loading the nearest FSS and frequency:
1) With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select FSS Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST FSS’ box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest FSS.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired FSS frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the FSS frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
Selecting and loading the nearest weather frequency:
1) With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Select WX Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST WX’ box.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired nearest WX frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the WX frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-91
GPS NAVIGATION
NRST - NEAREST AIRSPACES
Airspace Alerts
Note: At most, three
airspace alerts are
shown at any given time
Airspace Type
and Controlling
Agency
The Ceiling and
Floor Altitudes
(vertical limits)
Associated
Frequencies for
the currently
selected Airspace
Alert
Figure 5-60 Nearest Airspaces Page
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-60.
AIRSPACE ALERTS BOX
The Airspace Alerts Box displays the Airspace Name, Status, and Time to Entry. The status and time to
entry (if applicable) are based on the following conditions:
• If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes, the status field
shows the airspace as ‘Ahead’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will take the aircraft inside,
the status field shows the airspace as ‘Ahead < 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will not take the aircraft
inside, the status field shows ‘Within 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft has entered an airspace, the status field shows ‘Inside’.
The airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude, longitude, and altitude) to avoid nuisance
alerts. The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectored to provide complete information on any
nearby airspace. Once the described conditions exists, the status and time of entry is shown if the airspace alert
messages are enabled on the System Setup Page (Auxiliary Page Group; see the System Overview Section).
By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page, additional details are provided,
including controlling agency, communication frequencies, and floor/ceiling limits.
5-92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
GENERAL OPERATIONS
Selecting the Nearest Airspaces Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Nearest Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the seventh rectangular page icon.
SOFTKEY OPERATIONS
Viewing additional details for a listed airspace:
1) With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, select the ALERTS Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘AIRSPACE
ALERTS’ field.
2) Select the desired airspace.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Viewing and quickly loading the frequency for a controlling agency:
1) With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor in ‘FREQUENCIES’ field.
2) Select the desired frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MENU OPERATIONS
Figure 5-61 Nearest Airspaces Page Menu
Viewing additional details for a listed airspace:
1) With the Nearest Airspaces Page displayed, press the MENU Key (Figure 5-61).
2) Highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ box.
4) Select the desired airspace.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-93
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing and quickly loading the frequency for a controlling agency:
1) With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select Frequency Window’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Frequencies’ box.
4) Select the desired frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AIRSPACES
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays the following airspace types:
The Nearest Airspaces Page also displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace. The following are
examples of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:
• 5,000 ft MSL (5,000 feet mean sea level)
• 5,000 ft AGL (5,000 feet above ground level)
• MSL (at mean sea level)
• NOTAM (see Notice to Airmen)
• Unknown
• Unlimited
• See Chart
• Surface
All airspace messages, except for prohibited areas, may be turned on or off from the System Setup Page in
the Auxiliary Page Group. An altitude buffer is also provided on the System Setup Page to provide an extra
margin of safety above/below the published limits. Refer to the System Overview for details.
5-94
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.10 NEAREST AIRPORTS (PFD)
The Nearest Airports Window on the PFD displays the 25 nearest airports along with the information shown in
Figure 5-62:
Airport Symbol
Distance From
Nearest Airport
Identifier
Best Approach
Available
Primary COM
Frequency
Bearing
To Nearest
Airport
Figure 5-62 Nearest Airports Window
Length of Longest Hard
Surface Runway
(or soft surface if no hard
runway exists)
OPERATIONS
The Nearest Airports Window is enabled and disabled by selecting the NRST Softkey. From the Nearest
Airports Window, information for a selected airport can be viewed, the active primary communications frequency
can be selected, and direct-to navigation can be activated.
Airport Identifier
Airport Symbol
Facility Name
City, State
Airport Usage Type (e.g.
public, private, military,
heliport)
Elevation
Region
Fuel Types Available (AV
Gas, Jet)
Position Field
UTC Time
Figure 5-63 Airport Information Window
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-95
GPS NAVIGATION
Viewing information about an airport:
1) Select the NRST Softkey to display a list of the nearest airports.
2) Select the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) The airport information is displayed with ‘BACK’ highlighted at the bottom of the window (Figure 5-63).
5) When finished viewing the airport information, press the ENT Key to return to the nearest airports list.
Activating a direct-to:
From the Nearest Airports Window, highlight the desired airport, then press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to
Window appears. Press the ENT Key twice to activate.
Airport Identifier
Airport Symbol
Facility Name
City, State
Nearest Airports List
Flight Plan List
Bearing to
Direct-to
Waypoint
Position
Distance to
Direct-to
Waypoint
Course Field
Figure 5-64 Direct-to Window
Selecting a COM frequency:
From the Nearest Airports Window, highlight the desired frequency, then press the ENT Key. The frequency is
placed in the standby COM frequency field in the COM Tuning Box.
COM Frequency
`
5-96
Figure 5-65 COM Frequency
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.11 AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP (MFD)
The Auxiliary Pages provide detailed trip planning information, satellite status, RAIM prediction, system settings,
LRU status, and database information.
• AUX - TRIP PLANNING
• AUX – UTILITY
• AUX - GPS STATUS
• AUX - SYSTEM SETUP (see the System Overview section)
• AUX – XM INFORMATION (if XM product configured; see the System Overview Section)
• AUX - SYSTEM STATUS (see the System Overview section)
AUX - TRIP PLANNING
Page Mode
Inset Map
Input Data
Trip Statistics
Other Statistics
Fuel Statistics
Figure 5-66 Trip Planning Page
Trip Planning
Page Softkeys
The Trip Planning Page (Figure 5-66) displays calculated statistics regarding the projected path of flight, based
on a number of input parameters provided. There are two modes of entering the projected flight path, a flight
plan mode and a waypoint entry mode. There are two sources of input data, manually entered by the user, or
automatically updated through input sensors and equipment. The Trip Planning Page displays the following:
• An Inset Map showing the selected flight plan or flight leg. This map has an appropriate scale in order to see
the selection. If there is no selected flight path the map shows the current position.
• The selected flight plan number and selected leg number (in flight plan mode). The selected leg number may
be the entire flight plan.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-97
GPS NAVIGATION
• The selected ‘FROM’ and ‘TO’ waypoints. In waypoint mode these are the selected waypoints. In flight plan
mode with a specific leg selected the waypoints shown are the endpoints of the selected leg. In flight plan
mode with the entire flight plan selected the waypoints shown are the start and end waypoints of the selected
flight plan. In automatic flight plan mode with active flight plan selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present
position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the end of the selected leg.
• DEP TIME (departure time) - this defaults to the current time
• GS - ground speed
• FUEL FLOW
• FUEL ONBOARD
• CALIBRATE AS (calibrated airspeed) - in auto mode, the primary source of information is from the air data
system, and the secondary source of information is the GPS ground speed.
• INDICATED ALTITUDE - In auto mode, the primary source of information is the barometric altitude, and the
secondary source of information is the GPS altitude.
• PRESSURE (barometric pressure)
• TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE
TRIP STATS
• DTK (desired track)
• DIS (distance) - the distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9. The distance is shown in whole units
up to 9999.
• ETE (estimated time enroute) - this time is either be shown as minutes:seconds, if the time enroute is less
than an hour, as hours:minutes.
• ETA (estimated time of arrival)
• ESA (enroute safe altitude) - This value reflects either the ESA for the selected leg, for the route between two
selected waypoints, or for the entire flight plan, depending on what is currently selected.
• Destination sunrise and sunset times
FUEL STATS
• EFFICIENCY (fuel efficiency) - this value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• TOTAL ENDUR (time of fuel endurance) - this time is shown as hours:minutes and is obtained by dividing
the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• REM FUEL (fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg) - this value is calculated by taking the amount
of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.
• REM ENDUR (fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg)
• FUEL REQ (fuel required for trip) - this value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel flow.
See fuel endurance for an explanation of how time to go is calculated.
5-98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
• TOTAL RANGE (total range at entered fuel flow) - this value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATS
• DENSITY ALT (density altitude)
• TRUE AIRSPEED
• WIND DIRECTION, WIND SPEED, TAIL or HEAD WIND (only in auto mode) - the head wind is shown
as a tail wind value if appropriate.
OPERATIONS
FUEL PLANNING
The Trip Planning Page displays current fuel conditions along the active direct-to or flight plan using fuel
flow and/or fuel totalizer data. Fuel flow, ground speed (GS), and fuel on board values can be manually
entered for planning purposes.
Performing manual waypoint fuel planning operations:
1) Select the Trip Planning Page.
2) The current page mode is displayed at the top of the page, ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’. Select the MANUAL
Softkey.
3) For direct-to fuel planning, select the WPTS Softkey and enter the flight plan departure airport (FROM) in the
waypoint field (P.POS; present position).
4) Press the ENT Key and the flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint field.
5) Enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint.
6) Enter the following values:
•
DEP TIME (departure time) - this defaults to the current time
•
GS - ground speed
•
FUEL FLOW
•
FUEL ONBOARD
• CALIBRATE AS (calibrated airspeed) - in auto mode, the primary source of information is from the air data
system, and the secondary source of information is the GPS ground speed.
• INDICATED ALTITUDE - In auto mode, the primary source of information is the barometric altitude, and the
secondary source of information is the GPS altitude.
•
PRESSURE (barometric pressure)
•
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE
Once the last value is entered, fuel statistics for the direct-to are displayed.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-99
GPS NAVIGATION
Flight Plan
Number
Flight Plan Leg
Number
‘To’
Waypoint
‘From’
Waypoint
Figure 5-67 Flight Plan Mode
Performing automatic waypoint fuel planning operations:
1) The current page mode is displayed at the top of the page, ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’. Select the AUTO
Softkey.
2) For direct-to fuel planning, select the WPTS Softkey and enter the flight plan departure airport (FROM) in the
waypoint field (P.POS; present position) (Figure 5-67).
3) Press the ENT Key and the flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint field (Figure 5-68).
4) Enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint.
Once the ‘to’ waypoint is entered, fuel statistics for the direct-to are displayed, no manual input of data is
required.
Flight Plan Field
Not Accessible
Figure 5-68 Waypoint Mode
For fuel planning using a stored flight plan instead of direct-to waypoints, follow the steps previously given
for waypoint fuel planning except enter a desired flight plan number and/or a desired leg of the flight plan
instead of waypoints (Figure 5-69).
Figure 5-69 Flight Plan and Leg Number Fields
5-100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
AUX - UTILITY
Scheduler
Timers
Trip Statistics
Figure 5-70 Utility Page
The Utility Page (Figure 5-70) displays timers, trip statistics, and scheduler information for flight planning
purposes.
OPERATIONS
Setting the generic timer direction (up, down):
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘GENERIC’ timer field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘UP/DOWN’ window.
4) Select ‘UP’ or ‘DOWN’
5) Press the ENT Key.
Starting, stopping, or resetting the generic timer:
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Select the ‘START?’ field.
4) Press the ENT Key to start, stop, or reset the timer.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-101
GPS NAVIGATION
Setting the generic timer value:
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
4) Set the desired time.
5) Press the ENT Key.
Setting the flight timer starting criteria (PWR-IN, IN-AIR):
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Select the ‘FLIGHT’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection window.
5) Select either PWR-ON or IN-AIR
6) Press the ENT Key.
Setting the departure timer starting criteria (PWR-IN, IN-AIR):
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Select the ‘DEPARTURE TIME’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection window.
5) Select either PWR-ON or IN-AIR.
6) Press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Reset Flight Timer’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure timer:
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Reset Departure Time’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5-102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
TRIP STATISTICS
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu with the following reset options:
•
Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS – Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
•
Reset Odometer – Resets odometer readout only
•
Reset Maximum Speed – Resets maximum speed readout only
•
Reset All – Resets all trip statistics readouts
2) Select the desired reset option
3) Press the ENT Key.
SCHEDULER
The scheduler feature displays reminder messages (“Change oil”, “Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.).
One-time, periodic, and event-based messages are allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer
expires and reappear each time the G1000 is powered on, until the message is deleted. Periodic messages
automatically reset to the original timer value, once the message is displayed. Event-based messages do not
use a timer, but rather a specific date and time.
• Name
• Type (event, one time, periodic)
• Date
• Time
• REM (remainder)
Entering a name, event, time, or date:
1) Select the Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
3) Select the desired field.
4) Enter the data.
5) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-103
GPS NAVIGATION
AUX - GPS STATUS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Status
GPS Receiver Status
RAIM Prediction
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
Figure 5-71 GPS Status Page
The GPS Status Page (Figure 5-71) provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions and displays the
following information:
• Satellite constellation displaying the following for
each satellite being tracked:
GPS-calculated time of day
GPS-calculated altitude
Azimuth
Ground speed
PRN number
Track
Tracking status
• Satellite information status showing for the
aircraft:
• A receiver tracking status display that shows the
active GPS receiver and the following GPS solution
situations:
Dilution of precision (DOP)
‘2D NAV’, when only 2-dimensional position is
available
Horizontal figure of merit (HFOM), a measure of
horizontal position uncertainty
‘3D NAV’, when 3-dimensional position is
available
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)
Vertical figure of merit (VFOM), a measure of
vertical position uncertainty
• RAIM prediction information
• GPS satellite signal strengths
GPS-calculated position
5-104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
The sky view display at the top left corner of the page shows the satellites currently in view as well as their
respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view represents the horizon with north at the top of the circle;
the inner circle represents 45° above the horizon, and the center point shows the position directly overhead.
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (hollow signal strength bar) before the
satellite may be used for navigation (solid signal strength bar). Once the GPS receiver has determined position,
the G1000 indicates position, altitude, track, and ground speed. The GPS receiver status box also displays the
following messages under the appropriate conditions:
• Acquiring Sat - The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation. In this mode, the receiver uses satellite
orbital data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites
that should be in view.
• 2D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 2D navigation mode.
• 3D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite data.
The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix, using Estimated Position Uncertainty
(EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is
the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability
of laying. The EPU is a statistical error indication, not an actual error measurement. DOP measures satellite
geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from
0.0 to 9.9. The lowest numbers denote the best accuracy and the highest numbers denote the worst. HFOM and
VFOM are the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
OPERATIONS
RAIM PREDICTION
NOTE: RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
“RAIM” is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring, a GPS receiver function that
performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry
will allow the receiver to calculate a position within a specified protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for
oceanic and enroute, 1.0 NM for terminal, and 0.3 NM for non-precision approaches). During oceanic,
enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available.
The G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM
is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM will be available for a specified date and
time. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active — as indicated by an “Approach is not active” message, and a “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”
message.
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-105
GPS NAVIGATION
3) Select the ‘WAYPOINT’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Enter an arrival time.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Enter an arrival date. The cursor highlights the ‘COMPUTE RAIM’ field.
10) Press the ENT Key to compute RAIM. The following options are displayed:
•
‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ if RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
•
‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ if the RAIM calculation is in progress
•
‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted to be available for the given combination of waypoint, time, and date
•
‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the given combination of waypoint, time, and
date
GPS SIGNAL STRENGTH
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar
is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite number (01-32) below each bar. The
progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages:
• No signal strength bars - the receiver is looking for the satellites indicated
• Hollow signal strength bars - the receiver has found the satellites and is collecting data
• Solid signal strength bars - the receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellites are ready for
use
• Checkered signal strength bars - the receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data is displayed:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Select the GPS1 Softkey for the display of information pertaining to GPS1 or select the GPS2 Softkey for the
display of information pertaining to GPS2.
5-106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
AUX - SYSTEM SETUP
The System Setup Page (Figure 5-71) is the fourth AUX Page and provides access (via a list of menu options)
to manage the following system parameters:
• Local or UTC time display
• Units of measure settings (display units)
• Position Formats
• Map Datums
• Airspace Alerts
• Arrival Alert
• Audio Alerts
• MFD Data Bar Fields
• GPS CDI Range Adjustments
• COM Transceiver Channel Spacing.
• Nearest Airport Parameters
Refer to the System Overview section for a full description of the System Setup Page.
Figure 5-72 System Setup Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-107
GPS NAVIGATION
AUX - XM INFORMATION (OPTIONAL)
The XM Information Page (Figure 5-73) provides information and control of the audio entertainment
features of the XM Satellite Radio. Refer to the Additional Features Section for a detailed explanation of the XM
Information Page.
Figure 5-73 XM Information Page
5-108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
AUX - SYSTEM STATUS
The System Status Page (Figure 5-74) displays information regarding all detected LRUs, pertinent information
for all databases in the system, and the following airframe specific data:
• Airframe
• System software version
• CRG part number
• System ID
• Checklist
Refer to the System Overview Section for a detailed explanation of the System Status Page.
Figure 5-74 System Status Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-109
GPS NAVIGATION
5.12 VERTICAL NAVIGATION (MFD)
NOTE: An active flight plan or direct-to must be entered in order to utilize the VNAV feature.
Target Distance (from
reference)
Target
Reference
Target Altitude
Waypoint
Target Altitude
Reference (above
WPT or MSL)
Descent Rate
Target Altitude
Target
Vertical Speed
Required
Map Legend
Time to Begin
Descent or
Climb
Figure 5-75 Vertical Navigation Page
The Vertical Navigation feature allows the creation of a three-dimensional profile which gives guidance from
the present position and altitude to a final (target) altitude at a specified location. This is helpful when the pilot
wants to descend to a certain altitude near an airport or climb to an altitude before reaching a route or directto waypoint. Once the profile is defined, message alerts and additional data on the PFD informs the pilot of
progress. The Vertical Navigation Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-75.
OPERATIONS
Selecting the Vertical Navigation Page:
1) Press the FPL Key to select the Flight Plan Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the third rectangular page icon.
5-110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating a vertical navigation profile:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Select the third page icon.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) With the ‘TARGET POSITION’ distance field highlighted, select the desired distance for Top Of Climb or Bottom
Of Descent from the VNAV profile endpoint. The default distance is 4 nm.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now positioned over the ‘Before’ and ‘After’ field.
6) Select whether the previously set distance is ‘Before’ or ‘After’ the endpoint.
7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now placed over the VNAV profile endpoint field.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob to display a list possible VNAV profile endpoints. When using a flight plan, the target
reference waypoint itself can be specified from the waypoints contained in the flight plan. By default, the last
waypoint in the flight plan is selected. Highlight the desired waypoint.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) With the ‘TARGET ALTITUDE’ field highlighted, select the target altitude. If the selected altitude is above the
current aircraft altitude, a profiled climb is created. If the selected altitude is below the current aircraft altitude,
a profiled descent will be created.
11) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now placed in the ‘TARGET VERTICAL SPEED’ field. The default profile utilizes
a 400 foot-per-minute descent rate.
12) To change the vertical speed, enter the desired vertical speed.
13) Press the ENT Key when finished.
With the profile set, the vertical speed required (VSR) and ‘Begin Climb In’ or ‘Begin Descent In’ time is
displayed. Expect the following to occur when using the vertical navigation feature:
At one minute prior to reaching the Bottom Of Climb or Top Of Descent point (gray arc), the message
‘APPR VPROF - Approaching VNAV Profile’ is displayed as a PFD alert (Figure 5--76). The descent (or climb)
angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile. If selected, the vertical speed required
(VSR) readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the desired vertical speed to maintain the proper
descent (or climb) angle. At 500 feet above (or below, for a climb) the target altitude (white arc), an ‘APPR TRG
ALT’ - Approaching Target Altitude (Figure 5-77) message is provided. The VSR readout on the Navigation Map
Page is blanked out at this point.
Figure 5-76 Approaching VNAV Profile Message (PFD)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 5-77 Approaching Target Altitude Message (PFD)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-111
GPS NAVIGATION
VNAV MENU OPERATIONS
The VNAV messages are not enabled until the ‘VNAV Messages On?’ option is enabled from the VNAV Page
Menu (Figure 5-78). To display the page menu, press the MENU Key (with the VNAV Page displayed). The
VNAV Page Options Menu also allows the pilot to restore VNAV page defaults.
Figure 5-78 Vertical Navigation Page Menu
OTHER VNAV OPERATIONS
To display map data on the Vertical Navigation Map Page, select the MAP Softkey. Select the TOPO,
TERRAIN, or LTNG Softkey. Select the same softkey to remove the displayed data from the Vertical
Navigation Page.
5-112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
5.13 NAVIGATION MAP CONFIGURATION (MFD)
WARNING: Use of the MFD Navigation Map for pilotage navigation is prohibited. The Navigation Map is
intended only to enhance situational awareness. Navigation is to be conducted using only current charts,
data, and authorized navigation facilities.
This section describes the MFD Navigation Map Page setup and operation which in most cases will be a “onetime” operation since the setup can be customized to accommodate the individual needs of the pilot.
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
NOTE: MFD Navigation Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are
described in the Hazard Awareness Section of the Pilot’s Guide.
Wind Direction
and Speed
Map Orientation
MOA
VOR/DME
State Border
Nav Range
Ring
Navigation
Course Line
Towered
Airport
Interstate Highway
Topo Scale
Non-Towered
Airport
Map Range
Legend
Figure 5-79 Navigation Map Page
(not all map display items shown)
The Navigation Map Page (Figure 5-78) is the first page in the Map Page Group and provides the following
GPS Navigation display capability:
•Map display showing airports, NAVAIDS, airspaces, land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names (labels)
• Map pointer information (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name and other pertinent
information)
• Map zoom range legend
• Wind direction and speed
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-113
GPS NAVIGATION
• Heading indication
• Aircraft icon representing present position
• Icons for enabled map features
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Fuel range ring
• Topography data
NAVIGATION MAP SETUP
NOTE: Refer to Appendix G for a full description and interpretation of aviation map data.
Selecting the Navigation Map Page:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select the first rectangular page icon. The page group name and page title are
displayed below the Navigation Data Bar: MAP – NAVIGATION MAP.
OR:
3) Press and momentarily hold the CLR (DFLT MAP) Key.
The map can be customized using the map setup groups listed in the Navigation Map Page Menu (Figure
5-80). To display the menu, press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed). There are four
setup groups:
• Map
• Weather (optional)
• Traffic
• Aviation
• Land
Navigation Map
Page Menu
Map Setup
Option
Figure 5-80 Navigation Map Page Menu
5-114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
MAP GROUP
Figure 5-81 Map Group
Orientation
There are four map orientation selections: North up, Track up, DTK up, and HDG up. The orientation
default setting is ‘North Up’.
• North up fixes the top of the map to a north heading.
• Track up adjusts the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired Track Up (DTK up) fixes the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading Up (HDG up) fixes the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
Changing the map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field. Select the desired orientation and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-115
GPS NAVIGATION
Auto Zoom
The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts the map range from 2000 nm through each lower
range, stopping at 1.5 nm as the aircraft approaches the destination waypoint.
Enabling/disabling automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Land Data
The Navigation Map can display background land data (roads, lakes, borders, etc). The background
land data can also be removed from the display (turned off).
Enabling/disabling land data:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Track Vector
Track Vector
Figure 5-82 Track Vector
The Navigation Map can display a track vector as a dashed cyan line segment with an arrowhead
attached to the end, extended to a predicted location in 60 seconds along the current aircraft track. The
track vector is useful in minimizing track angle error.
Enabling/disabling the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-117
GPS NAVIGATION
Wind Vector
Wind Vector
Nav Range
Ring
Figure 5-83 Nav Range Ring
The wind vector (Figure 5-83) is displayed in the upper right corner of the map and displays wind
direction and speed (in knots). Wind direction is indicated by an arrow.
Enabling/disabling the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Nav Range Ring
The Nav Range Ring (Figure 5-82) shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass
card. The range of the Nav Ring is determined by the map range: 125 feet (500 feet map range) to 500
nm (2000 nm map range).
5-118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Enabling/disabling the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Topo Data
Topographic data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map using the ‘TOPO DATA’ setting.
The topo data range is the maximum map range on which topo data is displayed.
Enabling/disabling topo data and select a topo data range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
3) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Highlight the range field. TOPO ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range.
8) Press the ENT Key.
Topo Scale
The topo scale setting enables or disables the topography range box located in the lower right corner
of the Navigation Map.
Enabling/disabling the topo range box:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO Range’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-119
GPS NAVIGATION
Terrain Data
Terrain data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘TERRAIN DATA’
setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data is
displayed.
Enabling/disabling terrain data and to select a terrain data range:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. TERRAIN ranges
are from Off to 2000 nm.
8) To change the TERRAIN range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
9) Select the desired range
10) Press the ENT Key.
11). Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Obstacle Data
Obstacles
Figure 5-84 Obstacle Data
Obstacle data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’
setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data is
displayed.
5-120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Enabling/disabling obstacle data and to select a terrain data range:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. OBSTACLE
ranges are from Off to 50 nm.
8) To change the OBSTACLE range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
9) Select the desired range.
10) Press the ENT Key.
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page
Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV)
Flight Distance
Aircraft has
Remaining
Fuel Range
Ring
Figure 5-85 Fuel Range Ring
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the flight distance that the aircraft has remaining. A
dashed green circle indicates the transition range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the range
of all fuel, including the reserve fuel. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow
circle.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-121
GPS NAVIGATION
Enabling/disabling the fuel range ring and select a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. The time indicated is the time the aircraft can fly with remaining fuel on
board.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
WEATHER GROUP
Figure 86 Weather Group
The ‘Weather’ group customizes the display of STORMSCOPE® and XM weather on the Navigation Map
Page.
STORMSCOPE (Optional)
WARNING: The Stormscope system is not intended to be used for hazardous thunderstorm penetration.
Weather information on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the WX-500
Pilot’s Guide for detailed operation.
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for detailed information regarding the display of STORMSCOPE
and XM weather.
Enabling/disabling Stormscope lightning data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘On/Off’ window.
6) Select ‘On’ (display stormscope lightning) or ‘Off’ (remove stormscope lightning).
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ as the Stormscope lightning mode:
1) With the ‘Weather’ group displayed, select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
2) Select ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-123
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a Stormscope lightning symbol zoom range:
1) With the ‘Weather’ Group displayed, select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
2) Select the desired range.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
XM Weather (Optional)
WARNING: XM Weather is not intended to be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by XM Radio Service is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
• NEXRAD DATA - Turns the display of NEXRAD data and radar coverage on or off and selects the desired
display range.
• XM LTNG - Turns the display of XM Lightning on or off and selects the desired display range.
• CELL MOVEMENT - Turns the display of storm cell movement on or off. The Cell Movement option is
only shown when NEXRAD is turned on.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the ‘Weather’ Group displayed, select ‘XM LTNG’.
2) Select ‘On’ (display NEXRAD data) or ‘Off’ (remove NEXRAD data).
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting a NEXRAD zoom range:
1) With the ‘Weather’ Group displayed, select the ‘NEXRAD DATA’ range field.
2) Select the desired range.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Enabling/disabling XM lightning on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the ‘Weather’ group displayed, select ‘XM LTNG’.
2) Select ‘On’ (display XM lightning) or ‘Off’ (remove XM lightning).
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting an XM lightning symbol zoom range:
1) With the ‘Weather’ group displayed, select ‘XM LTNG’ range field.
2) Select the desired range.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling XM lightning cell movement:
1) With the ‘Weather’ group displayed, select ‘CELL MOVEMENT’.
2) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-125
GPS NAVIGATION
TRAFFIC GROUP
NOTE: If the G1000 is configured to use an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS), Traffic Information Service
(TIS) will not be available for use.
NOTE: Traffic Information Service (TIS) is only available when the aircraft is within the service volume of a
TIS-capable terminal radar site.
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for detailed information regarding the display of traffic.
Figure 5-87 Traffic Group
Enabling/disabling traffic data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed
3) Select the ‘Traffic’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
5-126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Selecting a traffic mode:
1) With the ‘Traffic’ Group displayed, highlight the ‘TRAFFIC MODE’ field.
2) Select the desired option.
3) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting a traffic symbol zoom range:
1) With the ‘Traffic’ Group displayed, highlight the ‘TRAFFIC SMBL’ field. Traffic symbol zoom ranges are from Off
to 300 nm.
2) Select the desired range.
3) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The traffic label displays the altitude separation above or below the symbol and the vertical speed sense
arrow to the right of the symbol.
Selecting a traffic label zoom range:
1) With the ‘Traffic’ Group displayed, highlight the ‘TRAFFIC LBL’ field. Traffic label ranges are from Off to 300
nm.
2) Select the desired range.
3) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
4) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-127
GPS NAVIGATION
AVIATION GROUP
Figure 5-88 Aviation Group
• Active Flight Plan (ACTIVE FPL)- The active flight plan zoom range sets the maximum range at which the
active flight plan magenta line is shown on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)- The active flight plan waypoint label size sets the size
at which the active flight plan names appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom
range sets the maximum range at which active flight plan waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000
nm).
• Large, Medium, and Small Airports (LARGE APT, MEDIUM APT, SMALL APT) - The airport label size sets
the size at which the large, medium, or small airport names size appear on the display. The zoom range
sets the maximum range at which the airports appear on the display:
• Large: off - 500 nm
• Medium: off - 300 nm
• Small: off - 100 nm
• Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION) - The zoom range sets the maximum range at which runway
extensions appear on the display:
• Off - 100 nm
• Intersection, Non-Directional Beacon, and VOR Waypoints (INT WAYPOINT, NDB WAYPOINT, VOR
WAYPOINT) - The INT, NDB, and VOR label size sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDS names
appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDS appear on the
display:
• INT: off - 30 nm
• NDB: off - 30 nm
• VOR: off - 300 nm
5-128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
• Airspace Boundaries (CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/TCA, and CLASS D) - The airspace zoom range sets the
maximum range at which the three classes of airspace appear on the display. The zoom range sets the
maximum range at which the airspace boundaries appear on the display:
• CLASS B: off - 500 nm
• CLASS C: off - 500 nm
• CLASS D: off - 300 nm
• “Other” Airspace Boundaries (RESTRICTED, MOA (Military), OTHER AIRSPACE, and TFR (temporary
flight restrictions). The other airspace boundary zoom range sets the maximum range at which restricted,
MOA, and other (training, caution, danger, warning, and alert areas) airspace boundaries are displayed
• RESTRICTED: off - 500 nm
• MOA (MILITARY): off - 500 nm
• OTHER AIRSPACE: off - 500 nm
• TFR: (only present when GDL 69 is installed): off - 2000 nm
Selecting an aviation group item text size:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
5) Select the desired aviation option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected text size.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting an aviation group item range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
5) Select the desired aviation option.
6) Select the desired range (RNG).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-129
GPS NAVIGATION
LAND GROUP
Figure 5-89 Land Group
• Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) - The LAT/LON label size sets the size at which latitude/longitude labels
appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which LAT/LON waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Highways, Roads, and Railroads (FREEWAY, LOCAL HWY, LOCAL ROAD, RAILROAD) - The highway
and road zoom range sets the maximum range at which highways, roads, and railroads appear on the
display:
• FREEWAY: off - 800 nm
• NATIONAL HWY: off - 80 nm
• LOCAL HWY: off - 30 nm
• LOCAL ROAD: off - 15 nm
• RAILROAD: off - 30 nm
• Cities and Towns (LARGE CITY, MEDIUM CITY, SMALL CITY) - The cities and town label size sets the
maximum range at which city and town names appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum
range at which cities and towns appear on the display:
• LARGE CITY (approximate populations greater than 200,000): off - 1500 nm
• MEDIUM CITY (approximate populations greater than 50,000): off - 200 nm
• SMALL CITY (approximate populations greater than 5,000): off - 50 nm
5-130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
• States and Provinces, Rivers and Lakes, and User Waypoints (STATE/PROV, RIVER/LAKE, USER
WAYPOINT) - the label range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the
display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the display:
• STATE/PROV: off - 1500 nm
• RIVER/LAKE off - 500 nm
• USER WAYPOINT: off - 300 nm
Selecting a land group item text size:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting a land group item range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
5) Select the desired Land option.
6) Select the desired range.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-131
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION MAP OPERATIONS
SELECTING A MAP RANGE
Map Range
Indicator
Figure 5-90 Map Range Indicator
The Navigation Map can be set to 28 different range settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles. The
current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the Navigation Map Page and represents the top-tobottom distance covered by the map. To change the map range turn, the Joystick counter-clockwise to
zoom in, or clockwise to zoom out.
5-132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
DECLUTTERING THE MAP
The Navigation Map can be quickly “decluttered” by repeatedly selecting the DCLTR Softkey until the
desired detail is displayed. The declutter level label is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey. Note that during an
instrument approach, automatic decluttering takes place. Table 5-2 lists the features that are turned off at
each declutter level. Note that some of the map features are automatically removed at certain zoom ranges
due to the map setup configuration for each map item. “SUA” listed in the following table stands for Special
Use Airspace. These are controlled airspaces, military zones, etc.
Map Features Always
Displayed
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route
Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
Terrain Proximity Data
Map Borders
Bearing Line
Lightning Strike Data
(when Stormscope
installed)
Nexrad Data
Traffic Symbols
Traffic Labels
No Declutter
Declutter (-1)
Declutter (-2)
Declutter (-3)
All Map features
visible
River/Lakes Names Only
User Waypoints
Large Airports
Land/Country Text
Latitude/Longitude Grid
Medium Airports
Large City
Medium City
Small City
Not Affected
Freeways
National Highways
VORs
NDBs
Intersections
SUA Group 0
SUA Group 1
SUA Group 2
Small Airports
SUA Group 3
SUA Group 4
Runway Labels
Local Highways
Local Roads
Local Road Labels
Railroads
Major Political
Boundaries
SUA Group 5
SUA Group 6
SUA Group 7
Obstacles
Table 5-2 Map Declutter Levels
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-133
GPS NAVIGATION
MAP PANNING
Data Fields
Map Arrow
Figure 5-91 Map Panning
Map panning (Figure 5-91) moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range.
When the panning function is selected by pushing in the Joystick, a map arrow flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the arrow,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position and the elevation of the land at
the position of the arrow. When the map arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted
and airspace information is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class
of airspace, the ceiling in feet expressed in Mean Seal Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Panning the map:
1) Push in the Joystick to display the map arrow.
2) Move the Joystick in the general direction of the desired destination to place the arrow at the destination
location. When the arrow is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except route lines.
When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, features or objects are displayed in the box located
at the top of the display. From here, the pilot can designate the waypoint as the direct-to destination. When the
arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is displayed at the
top of the display.
3) Push in the Joystick to remove the arrow and return to the present position.
5-134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Creating user waypoints:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, push the Joystick to activate the panning function. The map arrow is
displayed at the present aircraft position.
2) After placing the map arrow at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is
displayed with the captured position.
3) Enter a waypoint name.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.
5) If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-135
GPS NAVIGATION
DISPLAYING TOPOGRAPHIC DATA ON THE MAP
On-screen Map Maximum
Elevation
On-screen Map Minimum
Elevation
Aircraft Altitude
Maximum
Minimum
Ground Elevation
Figure 5-92 Topography Range Display
The Navigation Map displays various shades of topography land colors representing the rise and fall
of land elevation similar to aviation sectional charts (Figure 5-92). The Navigation Map can display a
topographic range representing various Key points of terrain elevation colors with their associated elevation
value labeled.
Displaying topographic data on the Navigation Map:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TOPO Softkey. Topo data can also be displayed on the Navigation Map by using the ‘On/Off’ topo
data map setup feature. See the Navigation Map Page Setup Menu section for more information.
3) Select the TOPO Softkey again to remove topo data from the Navigation Map. When topo data is removed from
the page, the Jeppesen Nav data is presented on a black background.
5-136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
Table 5-93 Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box (Figure 5-93) is displayed in the top center of the MFD and PFD. It displays
four, user-configurable fields which can display the information listed below. Instructions on changing a
data field are given in the System Overview section.
• Bearing to next waypoint (BRG)
• Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
• Desired track to next waypoint (DTK)
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Maximum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• Track angle error (TKE)
• Track angle (TRK)
• Vertical speed required (VSR)
• Cross track error (XTK)
• Currently selected MFD page title
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-137
GPS NAVIGATION
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Data Fields
Reference Point
Figure 5-94 Measuring Bearing and Distance on the MFD Navigation Map
The second map setup option is ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ (Figure 5-94), which provides a quick and
easy method for determining the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map.
Pressing the ENT Key at any location with the ‘Measure’ option enabled allows bearing and distance from
the newly selected position to be acquired.
5-138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Navigation Map
Page Menu
Measure
Bearing/Distance
Option
Figure 5-95 Measure Bearing/Distance Option
Measuring bearing and distance between two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. An on-screen reference pointer is displayed on the map display at the aircraft’s present
position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance is displayed
at the top of the map display. Elevation at the current position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push in the Joystick or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the page
menu.
6) Press the ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-139
GPS NAVIGATION
5.14 PFD INSET MAP AND PFD WINDOWS
GPS navigation operations on the Primary Flight Display centers around the use of the Inset Map and PFD
windows (Figures 5-95 and 5-96).
INSET MAP
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
NOTE: Inset Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are discussed in the
Hazard Awareness section.
The Inset Map is a smaller version of the MFD Navigation Map and is optionally displayed in the lower left
corner of the PFD when the system is not in reversionary mode. The Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET
Softkey. Inset Map features are enabled on the MFD (refer to the Navigation Map Setup section for details).
The Map Inset can display the following information:
• Moving map
• Zoom scale legend
• Orientation
• Aircraft icon
• TOPO data (optional)
• Traffic data (optional)
• Weather data (optional)
• Terrain data (optional)
• Indication of which map features are enabled
• Active navigation flight plan
• Track vector
• Wind direction/speed
• Latitude/longitude lines
• NAV range ring
• Fuel range ring (reserve; the fuel reserve rings are enabled and disabled from the MFD only)
• Obstacles data
• Potential terrain/obstacle impact data (TAWS / TERRAIN units)
5-140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
GPS NAVIGATION
Map Orientation
Active
Navigation
Route
Map Scale
Figure 5-96 PFD Inset Map
PFD WINDOWS
PFD windows are displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. PFD windows can display different types
of information, the discussion in this section of the pilot’s guide is limited to the following windows that pertain
to GPS navigation:
• Nearest
• Direct-to
• Flight Plan
• Procedures
• Timer/References
PFD
Window
Location
Figure 5-97 PFD Window Location
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-141
GPS NAVIGATION
OPERATIONS
The following Inset Map operations can be performed (operations are performed independently of the
MFD):
• Changing the zoom range
• Changing the declutter level
• Enabling/disabling traffic, topo, terrain, or optional weather information
• Map panning
To change the Inset Map zoom range, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease
the range. Zoom ranges from 500 feet to 2,000 nautical miles. To change the declutter level, select the INSET
Softkey. Select the DCLTR Softkey to remove background map details until the desired amount of detail is
displayed. The declutter level appears in the softkey (i.e., DCLTR-1).
Enabling/disabling traffic, topo, terrain, or optional weather data:
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC, TOPO, TERRAIN, or WX Softkey to display traffic, topo, terrain, or weather information.
3) Select the same softkey to remove the applicable information from the map.
Panning the map:
1) Push in the Joystick to display the map pointer. The map can now move beyond its current limits without
adjusting the range.
2) Move the Joystick to pan the map in the general direction of the desired location. When the pointer is placed
on an object, the name of the object is highlighted for approximately 4 seconds (even if the name was not
originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except for route
lines.
3) Push in the Joystick to cancel the panning function and return to the present position on the map.
5-142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Do not use any G1000 Weather Data for thunderstorm penetration. Weather Data is approved
only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: NEXRAD weather data is intended for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays and relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather should not be used for short-range avoidance of
weather. XM Weather information is not intended for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
is provided only for weather avoidance.
This section describes the hazard avoidance features of the G1000 system:
Weather
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor
• XM Weather
Traffic
• Ryan 9900BX
• TIS (Traffic Information Service)
Terrain & Obstacle/TAWS
• Terrain and Obstacle Proximity
• TAWS (Terrain Awareness Warning System)
Customizing the Hazard Display on the Navigation Map:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The
cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ Option (Figure 6-1).
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Menu (Figure 6-2).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ or ‘Traffic’ group to customize the display of features (Figure 6-3).
Select ‘Weather’ to customize the display of weather. Select ‘Traffic’ to customize the display of traffic.
4) Press the FMS Knob or press and hold the CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Refer to the Navigation Section for Navigation Map setup instructions.
Figure 6-1 Page Menu
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 6-2 Map Setup Menu
Figure 6-3 Map Setup Group List
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-1
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 WEATHER AVOIDANCE
STORMSCOPE® (OPTIONAL, COLUMBIA 350 ONLY)
WARNING: The Stormscope system is not intended to be used for hazardous thunderstorm penetration.
Weather information on the G1000 MFD is approved for weather avoidance only.
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 User’s Guide for a detailed description of Stormscope operation.
NOTE: Heading information must be valid in order to display Stormscope lightning data on the Navigation
Map Page. If heading information is lost, strikes and/or cells will not be displayed on the Navigation Map
Page.
The Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-4) and Stormscope Page (Figure 6-8) display cell and strike data using
the yellow lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-1.
The Stormscope® system detects electrical activity generated by cloud to cloud and cloud to ground lightning
strikes associated with hazardous convective weather. Stormscope receives electrical discharge information and
processes it to determine range and azimuth from the aircraft.
The detected electrical information is sent to the G1000 to plot the location of the thunderstorm activity on
the Navigation Map Page and the Stormscope Page.
Stormscope works on the ground as well as in the air giving planning information before takeoff.
Lightning Age
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Symbol
Table 6-1 Lightning Age and Symbols
6-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Displaying Stormscope lightning data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the STRMSCP Softkey. Selecting the STRMSCP Softkey again removes Stormscope Lightning Data from
the Navigation Map Page.
In normal operation, the mode and rate are displayed in the top right corner of the Navigation Map Page.
The mode is described by the word ‘STRIKE’ when in Strike Mode, or ‘CELL’ when in Cell Mode.
Cell Mode uses a clustering program to detect lightning and identify clusters of electrical activity that
indicate cells. Cell Mode is most useful during periods of heavy storm activity. Displaying cell data during
heavy storms helps determine where the storm cells are located. In Strike Mode, the Stormscope detects and
maps individual lightning strikes, showing sporadic electrical activity.
Lightning Cell
Mode and Rate
Lightning
Strikes
Stormscope
Symbol and
Display Range
Stormscope
Softkey
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Figure 6-4 Navigation Map Page Displaying Stormscope Lightning Data
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-3
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed on the Navigation Map Page up to 2000 nm zoom range (north
up). In the Track Up Mode a portion of Stormscope lightning data could be behind the aircraft that cannot
be seen at this range. Since the range of the Stormscope is 200 nm, the 500 nm range in North Up Mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner.
Figure 6-5 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
Turning Stormscope lightning data on or off:
1) Press the MENU Key. With the Weather Group selected, press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the ‘On/Off’ window.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob or press and hold the CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 6-6 Map Setup Menu Weather Group
6-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Selecting ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’ as the Stormscope Lightning Mode:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With the Weather Group selected, press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Push the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: Occasionally clearing Stormscope lightning data is a good way to determine if a storm is building
or dissipating. Stormscope lightning data reappears faster and in larger numbers in a building storm.
Lightning data appears slower and in smaller numbers in a dissipating storm.
NOTE: If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after each turn to ensure that
the strike and/or cell positions are shown accurately.
Stormscope data can be cleared from the Navigation Map Page by using the third Navigation Map Page
Menu Option, ‘Clear Lightning Data’ (Figure 6-7).
Removing Stormscope lightning data from the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’ and press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
NOTE: Occasionally clearing Stormscope lightning data is a good way to determine if a storm is building
or dissipating. Stormscope lightning data reappears faster and in larger numbers in a building storm.
Lightning data appears slower and in smaller numbers in a dissipating storm.
NOTE: If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after each turn to ensure that
the strike and/or cell positions are shown accurately.
Stormscope data can be cleared from the Navigation Map Page by using the third Navigation Map Page
Menu Option, ‘Clear Lightning Data’ (Figure 6-7).
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-5
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Removing Stormscope lightning data from the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’ and press the ENT Key.
STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data is displayed on the Stormscope Page in addition to the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting the Stormscope Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the Map Page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the Stormscope Page is selected (Figure 6-8).
The following Stormscope Page operations are available using softkeys, Page Menu Options, or knob
operation:
• Changing the Display Range
• Changing the Lightning Mode between Cell and
Strike
• Changing the Viewing Mode between 360° and
120° ARC
• Clearing Stormscope Lightning Data
To change the display range on the Stormscope Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counterclockwise to zoom in. Display ranges are 25 nm, 25 and 50 nm, 50 and 100 nm, and 100 and 200 nm.
Strike Rate
Mode
Map Range
Lightning
Strikes
Clear Softkey
Figure 6-8 Stormscope Page
6-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the Stormscope Lightning Mode between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE Softkeys are displayed.
3) Select the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box located in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
OR:
4) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed with the inactive mode highlighted (Figure 6-9). Press the
ENT Key to change to the highlighted mode.
Figure 6-9 Stormscope Page Options Menu
Changing the Viewing Mode between 360˚ and 120˚:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed (Figure 6-10).
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the inactive view. Press the ENT Key.
OR:
4) Select the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC Softkeys are displayed (Figure 6-11).
5) Select the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or select the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing
area.
6) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the default Stormscope Page.
Figure 6-10 Selecting 120˚ Arc
360 Softkey
ARC Softkey
BACK Softkey
Figure 6-11 360, ARC, and BACK Softkeys
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-7
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Clearing Stormscope lightning data from the display:
1) While viewing the default Stormscope Page select the CLEAR Softkey to remove all Stormscope lightning data
from the display.
OR:
2) Press the MENU Key. Select ‘Clear Lightning Data’ and press the ENT Key.
STORMSCOPE DATA ON THE NEAREST PAGES
In addition to the Navigation Map Page and the Stormscope Page, Stormscope data can be displayed on the
Nearest Pages.
Displaying Stormscope on the Nearest Pages:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired Nearest Page.
3) Select the MAP Softkey and then the STRMSCP Softkey to display Stormscope data.
Nearest VOR
Page
Lightning
Strike
Stormscope
Softkey
6-8
Figure 6-12 Stormscope Data on NRST Pages
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
Lightning Age
Symbol and
Display Range
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM WEATHER (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Before the GDL 69A can be used, it must be activated by XM Satellite Radio. The GDL 69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions delivered with the aircraft contain important information required to
initiate the XM satellite radio subscription for the GDL 69A.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) are displayed on all pages. Radar coverage is always displayed
with NEXRAD data.
The optional Garmin GDL 69A receiver interfaces with the G1000 to bring XM Weather and XM Digital Audio
Entertainment. XM Weather and XM Radio operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous uplink
capabilities at any altitude throughout North America. See the Additional Features section for information on
XM Digital Audio Entertainment.
XM weather information provided by the GDL 69A is displayed on the following MFD Maps and Pages:
• Navigation Map Page (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
• Nearest Pages (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
• Weather Data Link Page (complete XM Weather capability)
• Weather Information Page - part of the Waypoint Airport Information Page (METAR and TAF information
only)
• Flight Planning Maps (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
• AUX – Trip Planning Map (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
XM weather information is also displayed on the Primary Flight Display Inset Map. Complete weather
products include the following:
• Graphical NEXRAD Data (NEXRAD)
• Graphical Storm Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
• Textual METAR Data
• NEXRAD Radar Coverage (displayed with NEXRAD
data)
• Textual Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts (TAF)
• SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
• City Forecast Data
• Surface Analysis including City Forecasts (SFC)
• Graphical Wind Data (WIND)
• County Warnings (COUNTY)
• Graphical Echo Tops (ECHO TOP)
• Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
• Graphical Cloud Tops (CLD TOP)
• Hurricane Track (CYCLONE)
• Graphical Lightning Strikes (XM LTNG)
• Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)
• Graphical METAR Data (METAR)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-9
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When a weather product is active, the product symbol is displayed in the lower right of the screen. Cloud
Top and Echo Top may not be selected simultaneously.
• NEXRAD
• City Forecast
• Cloud Top/Echo Top
• Surface Analysis
• XM Lightning
• Freezing Levels
• Cell Movement
• Winds Aloft
• SIGMETs/AIRMETs
• County Warnings
• METARs
• Cyclone Warnings
The age for each of the enabled products are displayed
on the right side of the display (Table 6-2). Ages are based
on Zulu times when the data was processed, not the time
the data was received in the aircraft. When the age of a
weather product is greater than half of the expiration time,
the product time will change from cyan to amber in color.
Current weather products use an age stamp, ‘Age, _ _ _’
in minutes. Reported (forecasted) weather products use a
date/time stamp; ‘_ _/_ _ /_ _:_ _’.
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar
displays:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient
information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (hail vs. rain, etc.).
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum
antenna elevation angle. A NEXRAD site cannot depict
high altitude storms at close ranges and has no information
about storms directly over the site.
• The resolution of displayed NEXRAD data is 2 kilometers.
Therefore, when zoomed in on the display, each square
block is 2 kilometers on each side. The intensity level
reflected by the square will be the highest level sampled
within the square area.
6-10
Weather
Expires After Update
Rate
Product
“n” minutes
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12 Min
City Forecasts
60
12 Min
County Warnings
60
5 Min
Cyclone Warnings
60
12 Min
Echo Tops
30
7.5 Min
Freezing Levels
60
12 Min
METARs
90
12 Min
Lightning
30
5 Min
NEXRAD
30
5 Min
Radar Coverage
30
5 Min
Cell Movement
30
1.25 Min
Surface Analysis
60
12 Min
TFRs
60
12 Min
Winds Aloft
90
12 Min
TAFs
60
12 Min
Clouds Tops
60
15 Min
Table 6-2 Weather Product Age and Update Rate
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM WEATHER ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
WARNING: Use of XM weather for hazardous weather penetration is not recommended. Weather information
provided by XM Radio Service is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
NOTE: The Stormscope Menu Options are shown only when the Stormscope unit is installed. Stormscope is
not a GDL 69A Weather Product.
NOTE: The NEXRAD Option and the TOPO, TERRAIN, and STORMSCOPE Options are mutually exclusive.
When NEXRAD is activated, TOPO and/or TERRAIN and/or STORMSCOPE are turned off. XM Lightning and
the STORMSCOPE Option are also mutually exclusive.
The Navigation Map Page displays NEXRAD, Cell Movement, TFRs, and XM Lightning data
(Figure 6-13).
Displaying weather data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the NEXRAD and/or XM LTNG Softkey to display the desired weather. Select the applicable Softkey again
to remove weather data from the Navigation Map Page.
NEXRAD
Products, Storm
Legend, and Age
NEXRAD
Weather
NEXRAD and XM
Lightning Icons, 800
NM Range
Cell Movement
Indication
NEXRAD
Softkey
Figure 6-13 Navigation Map Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-11
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The XM Weather data and ranges displayed on the Navigation Map Page and can be customized by using
the Map Setup Weather Group Options Menu (Figure 6-14). The ranges are selectable from 500 feet to 2000
nautical miles. The following options are available:
• NEXRAD DATA – Turns the display of NEXRAD data and radar coverage on or off and selects the desired
display range.
• XM LTNG – Turns the display of XM Lightning on or off and selects the desired display range.
• CELL MOVEMENT – Turns the display of storm cell movement on or off. The Cell Movement Option is
shown only when NEXRAD is turned on.
Customizing the Navigation Map Page:
1) Press the MENU Key on the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) While the Map Setup Menu is displayed, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product
selections. When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option and press the
ENT Key.
NEXRAD, XM
Lightning, and Cell
Movement Options
Selected
Figure 6-14 Map Setup Options
6-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-15) displays all available XM weather products. The display of the
weather data can either be selected by softkeys located at the bottom of the display or through the Weather
Data Link Setup Menu. Composite data from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown.
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity. The update rate is every five minutes. Refer
to the legend for a description of the color code.
Selecting the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
NEXRAD
Products, Storm
Legend, and Age
NEXRAD
Weather
NEXRAD, Cloud
Tops and XM
Lightning Icons,
1000 NM Range
Lightning
Indication
Figure 6-15 Weather Data Link Page
NEXRAD, Cloud
Tops and XM
Lightning Softkeys
The XM Weather data and ranges displayed on the Weather Data Link Page can be customized by using
the Weather Data Link Page Options Menu (Figure 6-16). The options include NEXRAD data, Echo Tops
or Cloud Tops, XM Lightning, Cell Movement, SIGMETs, AIRMETs, METAR data, Surface Data and Time,
Freezing Level, Winds Aloft, County data, and Cyclone data. Echo Tops and Cloud Tops cannot be selected
at the same time. Ranges are selectable from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-13
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the display of weather data on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Press the MENU Key on the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select ‘Weather Setup’ on the Page Menu and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select an option for each selection and press the ENT Key.
Map panning moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range. When the panning
function is selected by pushing the Joystick, a panning arrow flashes on the Weather Data Link Page. Panning
over AIRMETs, County Warnings, TFRs, Echo Tops, METARs, SIGMETs, and Cell Movement displays text
information for the selection.
Pressing the ENT Key when panning over an AIRMET or a SIGMET displays the actual text of that alert.
Panning over an airport with METAR information does not display more information but pressing the ENT
Key and selecting that Airport’s Information Page displays the actual text. Pressing the ENT Key when
panning over a TFR displays TFR specific information for the panned TFR.
Winds Aloft
Data Selected
Figure 6-16 Data Link Page Setup Menu
6-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD – Selecting the NEXRAD Softkey displays NEXRAD weather and radar coverage information,
both of which are activated at the same time. The small NEXRAD legend is always shown in the upper right
corner of the display when NEXRAD is selected. Figure 6-17 shows a sample NEXRAD legend.
Figure 6-17 NEXRAD Legend
NOTE: Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude. The two products are not
available at the same time.
ECHO TOP – Selecting the ECHO TOP Softkey shows the location, elevation, and direction of the
highest radar echo. This may not indicate the top of a storm or clouds, only the highest radar return
echo. The information is derived from NEXRAD information and indicates the highest altitude at which
precipitation is falling. ECHO TOPS and Radar coverage are activated at the same time. ECHO TOPS,
NEXRAD and CLOUD TOPS are mutually exclusive. That is, when ECHO TOPS is activated, NEXRAD
and CLOUD TOPS are removed. Figure 6-18 gives a description of the ECHO TOPS coding. The update
rate is every 7.5 minutes.
The display of Radar Coverage is always active when NEXRAD and ECHO TOPS are selected. Where
information is not being collected, NEXRAD Radar coverage and ECHO TOPS areas are shown in a grayishpurple color. Areas where radar capability exists, but is not active or is off-line, will not be shown. The
update rate is every five minutes.
Figure 6-18 Echo Tops Legend
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-15
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity) measured in dBZ (decibels
of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Reflectivity
(designated by the letter Z) covers a wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more
convenient number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ), is used. The
dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the radar increases.
CLD TOP – Selecting the CLD TOP Softkey shows the cloud top altitude determined from satellite
imagery. Refer to Figure 6-19 for a depiction of the CLOUD TOPS color coding. The update rate is every
15 minutes.
Figure 6-19 Cloud Tops Legend
NOTE: Strike depiction represents cloud to ground strikes within a 2 kilometer radius of the actual strike
location. Therefore, the exact location of the strike is not displayed.
LTNG – Selecting the LTNG Softkey shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. The update rate is every five minutes.
Figure 6-20 Lightning Legend
CELL MOV – Selecting the CELL MOV Softkey shows the storm cells identified by the ground-based
system. The movement is depicted by an arrow. The update rate is every 1.25 minutes.
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
6-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: SIGMETs are broadcast for hazardous weather considered of extreme importance to all aircraft.
SIGMETs (for “SIGnificant METeorological information”) warn of the following weather hazards: severe
icing, severe and extreme turbulence, dust storms, sandstorms, or volcanic ash lowering visibility to less
than 3 miles. A Convective SIGMET (WST) is issued for hazardous convective weather (such as tornadoes,
thunderstorms, hail) and covers severe or greater turbulence, severe icing, and low-level wind shear. A
localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: AIRMETs are broadcast for weather phenomena that potentially affect all aircraft. For pilots of
light aircraft, AIRMET (for “AIRman’s METeorological information”) gives information about the following
conditions: moderate icing, moderate turbulence, sustained winds 30 knots or greater at the surface,
widespread areas of ceilings less than 1,000 feet and/or visibility less than 3 miles, and extensive mountain
obscurement. These are important to light aircraft that have limited flight capabilities, lack of equipment,
and/or instrumentation.
SIG/AIR – Selecting the SIG/AIR Softkey shows SIGMET and AIRMET information to advise the pilot of
potentially hazardous weather. The advisory covers an area of at least 3,000 square miles at any one time.
The update rate is every 12 minutes.
Figure 6-22 gives a description of the color coding.
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
When enabled, the following AIRMETs can be displayed:
• Icing
• Mountain obscuration
• Turbulence
• Surface winds
• IFR conditions
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-17
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METAR – Selecting the METAR Softkey displays METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports). METARs
are shown as colored flags at airports providing METAR reports. Figure 6-23 gives a description of the color
code. The update rate is every 12 minutes.
Figure 6-23 METAR Legend
LEGEND – Selecting the LEGEND Softkey displays the Weather Legends Window. Turn the small or
large FMS Knob to scroll up or down through the legend list. Press the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to
remove the legend display. The Weather Legends Window describes the graphic symbols and color coding
of the information for each product that is active.
On the Weather Data Link Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn either
FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: City Forecast and METAR information is displayed only within the installed Aviation Database service
area.
NOTE: When no data is shown at a given altitude for any of the weather features, the data for that altitude
has not been received or the data is out of date and has been removed from the display. Wait for the next
update. The update rate is every 12 minutes.
MORE WX – Select the MORE WX Softkey to display additional weather products.
SFC – Selecting the SFC Softkey (Surface Analysis) shows current or forecast conditions. The city
forecasts information is combined with the surface conditions. The SFC Softkey label changes to reflect the
forecast time selected. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Figure 6-24 Surface Condition and City Forecast Legends
6-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FRZ LVL – Selecting the FRZ LVL Softkey displays contour lines for freezing levels. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Figure 6-25 Freezing Level Legend
WIND – Selecting the WIND Softkey shows wind speed and direction at a selected altitude from the
ground up to 42,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the winds
aloft altitude selected. The wind direction is toward the dot on the wind vector line. The update rate is every
12 minutes.
Figure 6-26 Winds Aloft Legend
COUNTY – Selecting the COUNTY Softkey provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings for Tornado, Severe Thunderstorm, and Flood conditions provided by the National Weather Service
(NWS). Refer to the Legend for a description of the county warning icon. The update rate is every 5
minutes.
Figure 6-27 County Warnings Legend
CYCLONE – Selecting the CYCLONE Softkey shows the current location of cyclones and their projected
track at various time intervals. The update rate is every 12 minutes.
Figure 6-28 Cyclone Legend
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-19
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA ON THE NEAREST (NRST) PAGES
In addition to the Navigation Map Page, the Nearest Pages display NEXRAD and XM Lightning data
(Figure 6-29).
Displaying NEXRAD and XM lightning on the Nearest Pages:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired Nearest Page.
3) Select the MAP Softkey and then the NEXRAD and/or XM LTNG Softkey to display NEXRAD and/or XM Lightning
data.
Nearest
Airspace Page
NEXRAD
Weather
Nearest Page Group,
Last Page Selected
NEXRAD Icon,
30 NM Range
Figure 6-29 Nearest Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather
6-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
XM WEATHER ON THE WPT – AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE
NOTE: METAR is the Aviation Routine Weather Report and is generally standard around the world. The
temperatures are given in degrees Celsius. The atmospheric pressure however, is reported in hectopascals
everywhere but the US, where it is reported in inches of mercury. For aviation purposes, the standard
temperature and atmospheric pressure are 59°F (15°C) and 29.92 in Hg (1013.2 hPa).
NOTE: TAF is an airport forecast. TAF is generally standard around the world. TAF forecasts significant
weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected changes in weather conditions.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the WX Softkey. When
the WX Softkey is selected, the page title changes from ‘WPT – Airport Information’ to ‘WPT – Weather
Information’. The METAR data is first displayed in a decoded fashion, then the raw text is displayed. TAF
information is displayed only in its raw form. METAR and TAF information is updated every 12 minutes.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the Airport Information Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the WPT Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page.
3) Select the WX Softkey to display METAR and TAF text.
METAR
Text
TAF
Text
WX
Softkey
Figure 6-30 METAR and TAF Text Displayed on
the Airport (Weather) Information Page
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-21
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA ON THE AUX – TRIP PLANNING PAGE MAP
Displaying Weather Data on the Trip Planning Page Map:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor on the FPL Page.
3) Select the NEXRAD and XM LTNG Softkeys to display NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data on the Trip Planning
Page Map.
NEXRAD
Weather
NEXRAD and XM
Lightning Icons,
800 NM Range
Lightning
Indication
AUX Page Group,
First Page Selected
NEXRAD and XM
Lightning Softkeys
Figure 6-31 AUX – TRIP Planning Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather and XM Lightning
6-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA ON THE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE MAPS
Displaying Weather Data on the Flight Plan Page Maps:
1) Press the FPL Key to select the Flight Plan Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the flight plan list.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan.
5) Select the MAP Softkey.
6) Select the NEXRAD and XM LTNG Softkeys to display NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data.
Active Flight Plan
NEXRAD
Weather and
Lightning
Indication
NEXRAD and XM
Lightning Icons,
500 NM Range
Figure 6-32 Flight Plan Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather and XM Lightning
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
NEXRAD and XM
Lightning Softkeys
6-23
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is a Doppler radar system
that has improved the detection of meteorological events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes.
An extensive network of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental
United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is 124 nautical miles.
The following elements may cause abnormalities in the displayed NEXRAD images:
• Interference from buildings or mountains,
• Ground Clutter
which may cause shadows
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points
directly at the sun
6-24
• Military aircraft deploying metallic dust which
can cause alterations in radar scans
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and
Traffic Information Service (TIS). Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication.
NOTE: For a description of traffic advisory criteria and display interpretation, see the applicable Traffic
Advisory System Pilot’s Guide.
Traffic Avoidance Systems, consisting of Traffic Information Service (TIS) and the optional Traffic Advisory
System (TAS) are designed to help pilots detect and avoid aircraft intersecting their flight path. Both systems use
the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. Either system may be configured in the aircraft, but not both.
The major difference between the two systems is that TIS is passive, receiving traffic information from ground
stations to provide a five-second update rate. TAS uses an active airborne interrogator to look for close by aircraft,
giving the precise location with a half-second update rate. The TIS and TAS systems have similar ranges and
service volume.
The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nm radius, from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet
above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed on the Traffic Map Page according to TCAS symbology. Traffic
is displayed using four different symbols
• Non Threat Traffic—Hollow white diamond
• Proximity Advisories (PA)—Solid white diamond
• Traffic Advisories (TA)—Solid yellow circle
• Traffic Advisory Off Scale—Solid Split Circle, Yellow/Gray
Proximity Advisories (PAs) are defined as traffic within the 5.0-nm range, within ±1200 ft. of altitude separation,
and are not Traffic Advisories (TA). When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA a solid yellow circle symbol
is generated.
TIS provides vector lines showing the direction that the aircraft symbol is moving. TAS does not show vector
lines.
Altitude deviation from your aircraft altitude is displayed above the target symbol if they are above your altitude,
and below the symbol if they are below your altitude. Altitude trend is displayed as an up arrow (+500 ft/min),
down arrow (-500 ft/min), or no symbol if less than 500 ft/min rate in either direction. The traffic label displays
altitude separation and the vertical speed sense arrow to the right of the symbol.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-25
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the G1000 is configured for TAS, the system receives only TAS traffic. Otherwise, if TAS is not configured,
the system provides TIS traffic data.
Traffic information can be displayed on the following by selecting the MAP Softkey, followed by the TRAFFIC
Softkey:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Traffic Map Page
• NRST Pages
• PFD Inset Map
• Active Flight Plan Pages
• WPT VOR Information Page
• VNAV Flight Plan Pages
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: If a second TA appears or if the number of TAs displayed decrease then increase, new aural and visual
alerts are generated.
The G1000 System displays traffic on the Inset Map (PFD) and the Navigation Map Page (MFD). When a
traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occurs:
• The Inset Map pops up and displays traffic
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is generated
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation
appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds. The annunciation then remains on the display
until no TAs are detected in the area
Figure 6-33 Traffic Annunciation
• Whenever TIS service becomes unavailable “Traffic Not
Available” will be heard
The G1000 traffic voice alerts sound only when TIS is configured. When TAS is configured, the TAS equipment
provides audio alerts.
6-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
NOTE: Traffic and terrain data can be displayed by using the ‘On/Off’ Navigation Map Page Option. See the
Navigation Map Page setup for details.
Traffic is displayed on the Navigation Map Page only if aircraft heading data is available. When heading is not
available, Traffic Advisories are displayed as non-bearing banners on the Navigation Map Page.
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-34).
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
3) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Select the TRAFFIC Softkey again to remove traffic from the Navigation Map
Page.
Traffic Advisory at same
altitude, climbing &
moving in the direction
of the line
Aircraft Symbol
Traffic Symbol &
Display Range
MAP Softkey
Figure 6-34 Traffic on the Navigation Map Page (TIS)
Once traffic has been selected on one MFD Page it appears on all applicable MFD Pages and the PFD Inset
Map (Figure 6-35). Traffic display may also be deselected from the Inset Map without affecting the traffic
display on the MFD maps.
TA
Traffic
Symbol
Range
Figure 6-35 Traffic on PFD Inset Map
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-27
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Configuring traffic on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’
Option.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) The flashing cursor highlights the ‘GROUP’ field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Traffic’ and press the ENT
Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired Traffic Mode Option.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key. Repeat the step for Traffic Symbol
and Traffic Label.
6) Return to the Navigation Map Page by pressing the FMS Knob or pressing and holding the CLR Key.
Figure 6-36 Map Page Setup,
Traffic Options
Traffic Mode allows the pilot to choose how traffic is displayed (all traffic, traffic and proximity advisories, or
traffic advisories only and the maximum range the traffic symbol and traffic label are displayed).
6-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
CAUTION: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended only to help
the pilot visually locate traffic. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: General TIS operating information is described in Appendix F.
NOTE: Traffic Information Service (TIS) is not available in all areas. TIS is available only when the aircraft is
within the service volume of a TIS radar site.
A traffic symbol appears with the map range in the bottom right corner of the display indicating the presence
of traffic data on the map (Figures 6-34 and 6-35).
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-37) is the second page in the Map Group and displays the following
information:
• Current aircraft location, surrounding Traffic Information Service (TIS) traffic, and range marking rings
• System Status (OPERATE, STANDBY)
• A traffic alert message (FAILED, DATA FAILED, NO DATA, UNAVAILABLE)
• Traffic banner (AGE 00:, TRFC COAST, TA OFF Scale, TRFC RMVD, TRFC FAIL, NO TRFC DATA, TRFC
UNAVAIL)
Selecting the Traffic Map Page and Display Traffic:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the Traffic Map page is selected.
3) Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘TIS OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic Mode field.
4) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby Mode. ‘TIS STANDBY’ will be displayed in the
Traffic Mode field.
5) Rotate the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or rotate counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
If data is not received for a period longer than 6 seconds, the age of the present data will be displayed in
the lower left of the screen along with the annunciation that the system has entered Coast Mode. The system
will maintain the traffic display (up to 60 seconds) until the next data reception. If no data is received after
60 seconds, traffic will be removed from the display.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-29
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode
Map Range
Traffic Advisory (400’
Above, Descending)
Traffic Advisory,
Out of Range
Aircraft Symbol
Proximity Advisory at
current aircraft altitude,
level flight & moving in
the direction of the line
Non-Threat Traffic
(1600’ Above &
Climbing)
Traffic Banner, last
data update is older
than 6 sec. resulting
in Coast mode
Figure 6-37 Traffic Map Page (TIS)
STANDBY and
OPERATE Softkeys
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE OPERATIONS
Power-Up Test
The TIS interface performs an automatic test during power-up. If the system passes the power-up test,
the standby screen is displayed on the Traffic Map Page. If the system passes the power-up test, and the
aircraft is airborne, traffic is displayed on the Traffic Page in the Operating Mode.
If the system fails the power up test, the ‘NO DATA’, ‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed.
Contact your Garmin dealer for corrective action if the ‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed.
The ‘FAILED’ message indicates the GTX 33 transponder has failed. The ‘DATA FAILED’ message indicates
data is being received from the GTX 33 but a failure was detected in the data stream. The ‘NO DATA’
message indicates that data is not being received from the GTX 33 transponder.
Changing the Map Range
To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out, or turn the Joystick counterclockwise to zoom in. Map ranges are 2 nm, 6 nm, and 12 nm.
Operating Mode
Once the aircraft is airborne the system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode. The G1000
displays ‘OPERATE’ in the upper left-hand corner and begins to display traffic on the Traffic or Map Page.
The TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the pilot to an intruding aircraft. When a yellow circle traffic symbol
appears or a voice warning is announced, begin a visual search for the intruder. Maintain visual contact
to avoid the other aircraft.
Once the aircraft is on the ground (determined by system configuration at the time of installation) the
system switches from Operating Mode to Standby Mode. The Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’.
6-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• STANDBY – When the Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’ in the status box located in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system is in Standby Mode and does not display traffic data.
• OPERATE – When the Traffic Map Page displays ‘TIS OPERATING’ in the status box located in the
upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system is operating and can display traffic.
The pilot can switch between the Standby (STANDBY) and Operate (ON) Modes to manually override
automatic operation using the Page Menu or softkeys (Figures 6-37 and 6-38).
Switching between Operating Modes:
1) Select the MODE Softkey.
2) Select the STANDBY or ON Softkey to switch between modes. ‘STANDBY’ or ‘OPERATE’ is displayed in the
status box located in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page,
OR:
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed with ‘Standby Mode’ or ‘Operate Mode’ highlighted. Press
the ENT Key on the desired selection.
TIS AUDIO ALERT
A TIS audio alert is generated whenever the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page display increases from
one scan to the next. The limiting to TAs only reduces the amount of “nuisance” alerting due to proximate
aircraft. For example, when the first TA is displayed, the pilot is alerted audibly. So long as a single TA aircraft
remains on the TIS display, no further audio alert is generated. If a second (or more) TA aircraft appear on the
display, a new audio alert is sounded. If the number of TAs on the TIS display decreases and then increases, a
new audio alert is sounded. The TIS audio alert is also generated whenever TIS service becomes unavailable.
The volume of the audio alert (including the choice between a male or female voice) is configured during
installation. The following TIS audio alerts are available:
• “Traffic” – TIS traffic alert is received.
• “Traffic Not Available” – TIS service is not available or out of range.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-31
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS TRAFFIC STATUS
The MFD indicates the following TIS traffic status to the pilot:
• AGE – If traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds, an age indicator (i.e., ‘AGE 00:06’) is displayed in
the lower left corner of the display (when displaying traffic). After another 6 seconds, if data is still not
received, the traffic is removed from the display. The quality of displayed traffic is reduced as the AGE
increases.
• TRFC COAST – The ‘TRFC COAST’ (traffic coasting) banner located above the AGE timer indicates that
displayed traffic is held even though the data is stale (Figure 6-38). The quality of displayed traffic is
reduced when TRFC COAST is displayed.
• TRFC RMVD – The ‘TRFC RMVD’ banner indicates that traffic has been removed from the display due to
the age of the data being too old to “coast” (for the time period of 12-60 seconds from the last receipt of a
TIS message). Traffic may be present but not shown.
• TA OFF – The ‘TA OFF’ scale banner displayed in the lower left corner of the display indicates that a traffic
advisory is outside the selected display range. The traffic advisory off range banner is removed when the
traffic advisory is within the selected display range.
• TRAFFIC – On the PFD, when the system receives a traffic advisory a flashing ‘TRAFFIC’ alert is displayed
in the upper left-hand portion of the display. The PFD inset map also automatically displays traffic data.
TIS LIMITATIONS
TIS may not be available in the radar coverage areas for several reasons.
• Radar Out – The radar site may be out of service for various reasons. If the TIS Mode S sensor is not
operational, TIS is not available.
• Out of Radar Range – Traffic beyond the maximum Mode S site range will not be shown. If your own
aircraft or any other traffic is beyond the range of the TIS capable Mode S site, TIS is not available.
• Radar Cone of Silence – Whether your own aircraft or the other traffic is above the radar site in the cone
of silence, and out of range of an adjacent site, TIS data will not be received.
• Below Radar Coverage – If your aircraft or the other traffic is below radar coverage it will not be seen. In
flat terrain the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around
the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all directions.
• No Transponder – Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS. Aircraft without altitude
reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
6-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RYAN 9900BX TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM (TAS) (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Errors indicated by a failed screen prevent continued use of the TAS interface. See the applicable
Pilot’s Guide for detailed information on Failure Response.
The G1000 provides an optional display interface for the Ryan 9900BX Traffic Advisory System:
See the Ryan 9900BX Pilot’s Guide for more information.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE (TAS)
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-38) controls the source of traffic data on the Navigation Map Page.
Selecting the Traffic Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the Traffic Map Page is selected. The system begins to display traffic.
5) Rotate the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or rotate counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Heading
Indicator
Traffic Display
Range
Traffic Mode and
Altitude Display
Mode Indicator
Off Scale
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic 4700’
Below
Proximity Traffic
500’ Above &
Climbing
Mute Softkey
Figure 6-38 Traffic Map Page (TAS)
Altitude Mode
Softkey
Selecting the MUTE Softkey suspends aural alerts for 30 seconds. Selecting the MUTE Softkey twice will
allow hearing any Traffic Alerts that may have been issued while the system was muted.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-33
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Altitude Display Mode can be changed to show traffic in the selected range; the following softkeys
appear after selecting the ALT MODE Softkey:
BELOW
NORMAL
ABOVE
UNREST
With each selection, the screen changes to display the traffic detected within the selected altitude display
range. The G1000 screen also displays unrestricted traffic (UNREST) having a range of maximum specified
by the 9900 BX Pilot’s Guide. Refer to the 9900 BX Pilot’s Guide for information regarding altitude display
ranges. Note that confirmation is not required. The mode is changed immediately when selected.
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time.
To change the display range on the Traffic Page, turn the RNG Knob to zoom through the following range
options:
2 nm, 2 and 6 nm, 6 and 12 nm, 12 and 24 nm, and 24 and 40 nm.
Operating Mode
and Altitude Display
Mode Indicator
Proximity Traffic at
Same Altitude &
Climbing
Figure 6-39 Traffic Map Page (TAS), Altitude Selection
6-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE , and
UNREST Softkeys
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
TOPOGRAPHIC DATA ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
The Navigation Map Page displays various shades of topography land colors representing different levels of
land elevation similar to aeronautical sectional charts. The Navigation Map Page can display a topographic
scale representing key points of terrain elevation in the different colors. Their elevation value is shown in
the Topography Scale (Figure 6-41). The data given in the Topography Scale indicate to the pilot, how high
the aircraft is flying above the ground. See the GPS Navigation Section for more Navigation Map Page setup
information.
Displaying topographic data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TOPO Softkey. Topo data can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page by using the ‘On/Off’
topo data map setup feature.
Maximum and Minimum
Elevation of topography
displayed in the map view
on the screen
Aircraft altitude
Range of
topography
elevation displayed
in the map view on
the screen
Ground
elevation at
aircraft position
Figure 6-41 Topography Scale
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-35
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE PROXIMITY
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75 degrees north or 60 degrees
south.
The Terrain and Obstacle Proximity feature increases situational awareness to avoid Controlled Flight Into
Terrain (CFIT). It provides look-ahead capability that gives a visual presentation of potential terrain and obstacle
hazards above and beneath the aircraft. Terrain and Obstacle Proximity requires the following components to
operate properly:
•
Valid 3D GPS position
•
Valid Terrain/Obstacle Database
The G1000 GPS provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)–based altitude (GPS–MSL Altitude) and is used to
determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL Altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry but is
not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS–MSL
Altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL Altitude. GPS Altitude is a reliable MSL
altitude source used to calculate terrain and obstacle location.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to mean sea level. Using the GPS position and altitude, the
Terrain and Obstacle Proximity feature portrays a 2D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. The GPS position and GPS–MSL Altitude are used to calculate and
predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can
view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle conditions.
Terrain elevation is shown relative to the aircraft altitude in Figure 6-40. Obstacle symbols and color are
given in Table 6-3. Terrain and obstacles that are above the aircraft or less than 100 feet below the aircraft
altitude are shown in red. Those between 100 feet and 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in yellow.
Terrain and obstacles lower than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in black.
6-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
��������������������������������
�����������������
�����������������
������������
Terrain Color
Red
Yellow
Black
Terrain Location
Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-40 Terrain Proximity Indications and Colors
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Obstacle
< 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL Color
Obstacle Symbol
Red
Obstacle Location
Obstacle above, or within 100 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Yellow
Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Table 6-3 Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Terrain information can be displayed on the following pages:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Terrain Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Pages
• PFD Inset Map
• VNAV Flight Plan Pages
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-37
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN DATA ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Terrain and obstacle data is displayed on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-42). Obstacles are shown on the
Navigation Map Page at or below the map range of 20 nm.
Displaying Terrain Data on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display the terrain and obstacle data on the Navigation Map Page. Select the
TERRAIN Softkey again to remove the terrain and obstacle data from the Navigation Map Page.
Data for
Selected
Lighted
Obstacle
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacle (Above or
Within 100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Cursor Placed on
Lighted Obstacle Gives
Height in MSL & AGL
Aircraft Symbol
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Terrain Symbol & Range
MAP Softkey
Figure 6-42 Terrain on the Navigation Map Page (TIS)
Terrain can be selected on the PFD inset map (Figure 6-43) by selecting the TERRAIN Softkey. Terrain
display may also be deselected from the inset map without affecting the terrain display on the MFD maps.
Lighted
Obstacle
Terrain
Symbol
Range
Figure 6-43 Terrain on PFD Inset Map
Obstacles are shown on the Terrain Page at or below the map range of 10 nm.
6-38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The MAP – Terrain Proximity Page is in the MAP group of pages. The page has two view settings, 360° View
centered about the aircraft position in the middle of the screen or ARC View, a 120° view of terrain ahead.
Displaying terrain and obstacles on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the last rectangular page icon.
3) Rotate the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or rotate counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Map Range
Black Terrain Area
(More Than 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacle (Above or
Within 100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Unlighted
Obstacle
Terrain Legend
VIEW Softkey
Figure 6-44 Terrain Proximity Page (360˚ View)
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and ARC view:
1) Select the Terrain Page.
2) Select the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC Softkeys are displayed.
3) Select the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or select the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area
(Figures 6-443 and 6-45).
OR:
4) Select the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed. Turn either FMS Knob to select the inactive view. Press the
ENT Key.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-39
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range (No
Obstacles Shown
Beyond 10 NM)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain Area
(More Than 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-45 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
360° and ARC
Softkeys
TERRAIN DATA ON THE AUX – TRIP PLANNING PAGE MAP
Displaying Terrain on the Trip Planning Page Map:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
3) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain data on the AUX - Trip Planning page map.
Yellow and Red
Terrain Areas
Terrain Symbol
and Range
MAP Softkey
Figure 6-46 Terrain on the AUX- Trip Planning Page
6-40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN DATA ON THE VNAV PAGE
Displaying Terrain on the VNAV Page:
1) Press the FPL Key to select the Flight Plan Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the FPL–Vertical Navigation Page.
3) Select the MAP Softkey.
5) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain data on the VNAV page map.
Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more Navigation Map Page setup instructions.
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted
Obstacles (Above or
Within 100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Unlighted
Obstacle (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
MAP Softkey
Figure 6-47 Terrain on VNAV Page
Terrain Symbol
and Range
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE PROXIMITY LIMITATIONS
The system displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database, which may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if available
in the database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to visual acquisition, and not to
navigate or maneuver around terrain.
• Not all obstructions may be available in the Terrain and Obstacle database
• The Terrain and Obstacle database may contain inaccuracies
• No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a 3D GPS position.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-41
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN AWARENESS & WARNING SYSTEM (TAWS) CLASS B (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: TAWS data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75 degrees north or 60 degrees
south.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). It provides look-ahead capability that gives automatic
aural and visual warnings of potential terrain hazards above and beneath the aircraft. TAWS requires the
following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3D GPS position
• Valid Terrain/Obstacle Database
The G1000 GPS provides TAWS with horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)–based altitude (GPS–MSL Altitude) and
is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity and TAWS alerts. GPS-MSL Altitude accuracy is affected
by satellite geometry but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude sensors. GPS–MSL Altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL Altitude. GPS
Altitude is a reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle location.
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level. Using the GPS position
and altitude, TAWS portrays a 2D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. The GPS position and GPS-MSL Altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s
flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, TAWS can provide the pilot with
advance alerts of predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle conditions.
Terrain elevation is shown relative to the aircraft altitude in Figure 6-48. Terrain and obstacles that are above
the aircraft or less than 100 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in red. Those between 100 feet and
1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in yellow. Terrain and obstacles lower than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are shown in black
����������������������
��������������������������������
���������������������
���������������
������������������
����������
.
6-42
Figure 6-48 Terrain Proximity Indications
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Color
Red
Yellow
Black
Terrain/Obstacle Location
Terrain/Obstacle above or within 100’
below current aircraft altitude.
Terrain/Obstacle between 100’ and
1000’ below current aircraft altitude.
Alert Level
Terrain/Obstacle is more than 1000’
below aircraft altitude.
NO DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Suggested Pilot Response
Initiate climb and/or turn away from
terrain/obstacle.
Be aware of surroundings.
Be prepared to take action.
No action required.
Table 6-4 Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Suggested Pilot Response
The MAP – TAWS Page is in the MAP group of pages. The TAWS Page has two view settings, 360° View
centered about the aircraft in the middle of the screen or ARC View, a 120° view of terrain ahead.
When selecting ARC view, the screen presentation of terrain ahead becomes larger and more prominent.
Displaying the TAWS Page and selecting the 360˚ and ARC view:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS Page.
3) Select the VIEW Softkey. The ARC and 360 Softkeys are displayed.
4) Select the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚ viewing area or select the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area
(Figures 6-49 and 6-50).
OR:
5) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed. Turn either FMS Knob to select the inactive view. Press the
ENT Key.
6) Rotate the Joystick clockwise or counter-clockwise to display a larger or smaller area.
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Heading Mode
GPS Altitude
Map Range
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain Area
(More Than 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-49 TAWS Page (360˚ View)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
VIEW Softkey
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-43
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range (No
Obstacles Shown
Beyond 10 NM)
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain Area
(More Than 1000’
below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-50 TAWS Page (ARC View)
360° and ARC
Softkeys
Enable/Disable Aviation Data
1) While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select “Show (or Hide) Aviation Data”.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-51 TAWS Page Menu
Displaying Terrain and Obstacles on the Navigation Map
1) With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey. Terrain and obstacle proximity will now be displayed on the map.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000’ AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000’ AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000’ AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000’ AGL)
Potential Impact Points
Figure 6-52 TAWS Obstacle Symbols
6-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS INHIBIT
Flying into an area where unique terrain exists could cause the system to annunciate a nuisance alert. Only
FLTA and PDA alerts are disabled.
To Inhibit TAWS:
1) While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inhibit TAWS’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
To Enable TAWS:
1) While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enable TAWS’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
MANUAL SYSTEM TEST
A system test is automatically performed at power-up (Figure 6-53). After successful completion of the test,
“TAWS System Test, OK” is heard.
The system test may also be initiated manually, but only when the aircraft is on the ground.
Verifying operation of the aural and visual annunciations:
1) While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test TAWS’.
3) Press the ENT Key. During the test ‘TAWS TEST’ is displayed in the center of the TAWS Page.
Upon completion of a successful test, “TAWS System Test, OK” will be heard.
Figure 6-53 PFD Test Annunciation
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance alert is composed of two sub-functions, Required Terrain Clearance
(RTC) and Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC).
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-45
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
REQUIRED TERRAIN CLEARANCE (RTC) AND REQUIRED OBSTACLE CLEARANCE (ROC)
Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) provide alerts when the
aircraft flight path is above terrain and/or obstacles, yet is projected to come within minimum clearance
values given in Table 6-5. When an RTC or ROC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on
the TAWS Page as a yellow or red ‘X’.
Phase of Flight
Level Flight
Descending
Enroute
700 ft.
500 ft.
Terminal
350 ft.
300 ft.
Approach
150 ft.
100 ft.
Departure
100 ft.
100 ft.
Table 6-5 ITI and IOI Minimum Clearance Alert Altitude
IMMINENT TERRAIN IMPACT (ITI) AND IMMINENT OBSTACLE IMPACT (IOI)
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) provide alerts when the aircraft
is below the elevation of terrain in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by
a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Page and Navigation Map Page as a yellow or red ‘X’
(Figure 6-54). The alert is given when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within
minimum clearance altitudes given in Table 6-6.
During the final approach phase of flight, RTC/ROC/ITI/IOI alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or is below 125 feet AGL while
within 1 nm of the runway.
6-46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
POP-UP ALERTS
When the Navigation Map Page is displayed, and a terrain or obstacle alert is issued, a pop-up window is
displayed with the appropriate alert (Figure 6-54).
Press the ENT Key to display the TAWS Page, or press the CLR Key to remain on the Navigation Map
Page.
Terrain Impact
Points
Pop-Up Alert
Figure 6-54 Terrain Impact Points
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-47
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERT (PDA)
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the aircraft is ` below the normal approach path to the
runway. The PDA alert is heard only during a descent to landing. There are three different scenarios when
the PDA is issued:
• No Approach Loaded - PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport. It
ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while
within 1 nm of the threshold. During the final descent, the alerting threshold is based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
• Non-Precision Approach Loaded - PDA alerting begins when the FAF is the active waypoint and the aircraft
is within 15 nm of the destination airport. PDA alerting ends at 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or at an
altitude of 125 feet AGL within 1 nm of the threshold (Figure 6-55).
• ILS Approach Loaded—PDA alerting begins when the FAF is the active waypoint and the aircraft is within
15 nm of the airport. Once the aircraft intercepts the glideslope, PDA will alert the pilot if the aircraft
descends 0.7 degrees below the glideslope. PDA alerting ends 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or at an
altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 nm of the threshold (Figure 6-56).
Final Approach Fix
200' below FAF Altitude
Runway Threshold
CAUTION
0.5 nm
15 nm
Figure 6-55 Non-Precision Approach PDA Alert Threshold
��������������������
������������������
�����������������������
����������������
������
�������
������������
���������������������
�����
Figure 6-56 ILS Approach PDA Alert Threshold
6-48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT (EDR)
The Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert provides an audible warning when the aircraft is descending toward
the ground at excessive speed. Figure 6-58 shows the relationship between the height above the terrain
and the descent rate. When the aircraft is in the EDR alert area shown in yellow, the system announces the
caution, “Sink Rate.” When the aircraft is in the EDR alert area shown in red, the system announces the
warning, “Pull Up.”
5000
"
K
RA
TE
4000
IN
3500
"S
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
2500
2000
1500
UP"
PULL UP"
""PULL
1000
500
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-57 Excessive Descent Rate
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff (NCR) alert provides an audible warning when the aircraft is
losing altitude after takeoff. The aural message, “Don’t Sink” or “Too Low - Terrain” is given for NCR alerts,
accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain alert on the display.
NCR alert is active only during the departure phase of flight under the following conditions:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• The aircraft is less than 2 nm from the departure airport
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees.
“FIVE-HUNDRED” AURAL ALERT
The “Five-hundred” alert provides an audible advisory to the crew when the aircraft descends to within 500
feet of terrain. At 500 feet the aural message “Five hundred” is heard. There are no display annunciations or
pop-up alerts that accompany the “Five-hundred” aural message.
“Five-hundred” alert is enabled when the aircraft’s height above the terrain is more than 675 feet. The alert
is disabled when the aircraft’s height above the terrain becomes less than 500 feet.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-49
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS LIMITATIONS
TAWS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database, which may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if available
in the database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to visual acquisition, and not to
navigate or maneuver around terrain.
• Not all obstructions may be available in the Terrain and Obstacle database
• The Terrain and Obstacle database may contain inaccuracies
• No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a 3D GPS position.
TAWS ALERTS SUMMARY
TAWS alerts appear on the PFD and MFD (Figures 6-58 and 6-59).
TAWS Annunciation
TAWS
Annunciations
Figure 6-58 TAWS Annunciation on the PFD
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 6-59 TAWS Annunciation on the MFD
Table 6-7 shows the possible TAWS alert types, PFD/MFD annunciations, Pop-Up alerts, and aural
messages.
6-50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI)
or
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI)
or
Premature Descent Alert Caution
(PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
None
None
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull
Up”
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull
Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Table 6-7 TAWS Annunciations, Pop-Up Alerts, and Aural Messages
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
6-51
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Table 6-8 shows the possible system status annunciations and aural alert messages.
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively
degraded GPS signal
None
System Test in progress
None
“TAWS Not Available”
(“TAWS Available” will be heard when
sufficient GPS signal is re-established)
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
System Test pass
None
Table 6-8 TAWS System Status Annunciations and Aural Messages
6-52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: This section assumes the reader is already familiar with the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck. Refer to the
G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide and other sections in this Pilot’s Guide for further information concerning
the G1000 System.
NOTE: The Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes the information in this guide.
AFCS OVERVIEW
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000 System
avionics architecture. Refer to Figure 1-1 in the System Overview for a block diagram supporting this system
description. GFC 700 AFCS functionality in the Columbia 350/400 is distributed across the following Line
Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2)
• GDU 1042 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter (1)
• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (2)
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63. Flight
director commands are displayed on the PFD.
The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch and roll servos and the pitch trim adapter
and provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands,
AHRS attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-1
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS
GDU 1042 BEZEL CONTROLS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
AP Key
2 FD Key
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
NAV Key
ALT Key
VS Key
FLC Key
HDG Key
APR Key
Pressing the FD Key turns on the flight director in default pitch and roll modes.
Pressing the FD Key again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command
Bars. If the autopilot is engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
NOSE UP/
NOSE DN Keys
Control the active mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes
1
2
7
3
8
4
5
9
6
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
7-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect) The AP DISC Switch is located on the control stick.
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)
Momentarily disengages the autopilot and synchronizes the flight director’s
Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode)
and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
The CWS Button is located on the control stick.
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the currently active pitch and roll modes.
CWS operation details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this
manual.
Go Around Switch
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
The Go Around Switch is located on the throttle.
Used to command manual electric trim
MET Switch
(Manual Electric Trim) The trim switch is located on the control stick; push up/down for MET
The MET Switch can be used to cancel autopilot disconnect alerting.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-3
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Pressing the FD or AP Key (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director in default pitch/
roll modes. Pushing the Go Around Switch or any fight director mode key activates the flight director in the
respective mode(s). The flight director may be turned off by pressing the FD Key. The FD Key is disabled when
the autopilot is engaged.
AFCS STATUS BOX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
roll modes are shown on the left and pitch on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in
green. Autopilot status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Roll Modes
Armed
Active
Autopilot
Status
Pitch Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
AFCS Status Box
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
7-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single cue. The Command
Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands, and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display.
Figure 7-3 Command Bars
FLIGHT DIRECTOR LIMITATIONS
The maximum commanded pitch and roll attitudes are limited to values established during AFCS certification:
-15°/+20° pitch and 22° bank. Vertical acceleration and maximum commanded roll rate are also limited. Limits
may be different from these values in certain modes as noted.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-5
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
NOTE: If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the
flight director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. If the attitude information required to
compute the default flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight director automatically
disengages.
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise specified,
all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection, the flight
director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes(s).
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Automatic transition from
armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green active mode field
and flashing for ten seconds.
In general, a flashing yellow mode annunciation indicates either the loss of sensor (AHRS, ADC, GIA) or
navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS) required to compute commands.
Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal
When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level or maintain the pitch, depending
on the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops when the pilot presses the affected mode key or selects
another mode for the axis. After ten seconds, if no pilot action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops and the
flight director enters the default mode for the affected axis.
7-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH MODES
The GFC 700 AFCS offers the following pitch modes:
• Pitch Hold (default mode) – Holds the current aircraft pitch attitude while the aircraft is climbing/descending
to the Selected Altitude
• Altitude Hold – Holds the current aircraft altitude
• Vertical Speed – Maintains the current aircraft vertical speed while the aircraft is climbing/descending to the
Selected Altitude
• Flight Level Change – Maintains the current aircraft airspeed while the aircraft is climbing/descending to the
Selected Altitude
• Glideslope – Intercepts and tracks the glideslope on approach
• Go Around – Automatically disengages the autopilot and commands a constant pitch angle and wings level
The following table lists each pitch mode with the corresponding control and annunciation. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed (also displayed
with the Vertical Speed Indicator), and Flight Level Change (also displayed with the Airspeed Indicator) modes.
The NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys may be used to change the pitch mode reference while operating under Pitch
Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change for each mode using the NOSE UP/
NOSE DN keys are listed next to the mode annunciation in the table:
Pitch Mode
Control
Pitch Hold
(default)
Altitude Hold
ALT Key
Vertical Speed
VS Key
Flight Level Change
FLC Key
Glideslope Arm/Capture/Track
APR Key
Go Around
Go Around Switch
Mode
Mode Reference
Annunciation Change Increment
PIT
0.5°
ALT nnnnn FT
VS nnnn FPM
100 fpm
FLC
nnn KT
1 kt
GS
GA
Table 7-1 Pitch Modes
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-7
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated by the green annunciation ‘PIT’ in the active pitch mode field.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference, while the
aircraft is climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). The pitch reference is
set to the aircraft attitude at the moment of mode engagement. If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight
director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down
limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted from -15° to +20°:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys
• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Pitch Hold Mode Active
Altitude Hold Mode Armed
Command Bars
Maintain Desired
Pitch Reference
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
7-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
Altitude Hold Mode is engaged by pressing the ALT Key; the mode is indicated by an ‘ALT’ annunciation in
the AFCS Status Box. In this mode, the flight director establishes and maintains the current aircraft altitude
as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference is shown in the AFCS Status Box and is
independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Rotating the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
director’s Altitude Reference.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
If the Selected Altitude is captured during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed. To
adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected Altitude
is captured.
ALTITUDE ARM/CAPTURE
Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically when the flight director is in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed,
Flight Level Change, or Go Around Mode. This is indicated by a white annunciation ‘ALT’ in the armed
pitch mode field. When armed, the flight director commands a constant acceleration maneuver to capture
and level off at the Selected Altitude. When the flight director starts the altitude capture, it transitions to
Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude; in this case, the Altitude Reference corresponds to the
Selected Altitude. The white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes green for
ten seconds to indicate transition to Altitude Hold Mode.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Flight Director
Altitude Reference
Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Bug
Command Bars
Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude
Reference
Figure 7-6 Altitude Hold Mode
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-9
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key. The annunciation ‘VS’ appears in the active pitch
mode field, along with the Vertical Speed Reference to the right; the Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed
above or below the Vertical Speed Indicator, depending on whether the aircraft is climbing or descending.
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference as it climbs or
descends to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). Current aircraft vertical speed becomes the
Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode engagement. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug
corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for Vertical Speed Reference limits.
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above/below the Vertical Speed
Indicator) may be changed:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys
• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Vertical Speed Vertical
Altitude Hold
Speed Mode
Mode Active Reference
Armed
Selected Altitude
Vertical Speed
Reference
Vertical Speed
Reference Bug
Command Bars
Indicate Climb
Figure 7-7 Vertical Speed Mode
7-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before engaging Flight Level Change Mode.
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). The
Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon FLC Mode engagement. Flight Level Change Mode
is indicated by an ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the Airspeed Reference and the desired flight profile (climb or descent). The flight director maintains the
current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not allow the
aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for Airspeed Reference limits.
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys
• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button
to establish the new Airspeed Reference
Flight Level Change Airspeed Altitude Hold
Mode Active Reference Mode Armed
Airspeed Reference
Airspeed Reference Bug
Figure 7-8 Flight Level Change Mode
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-11
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is only available when the flight director has been set for approach (see Approach Mode
under roll modes) and is annunciated in the AFCS Status Box as ‘GS’. Glideslope Mode is automatically
armed under the following conditions:
• Valid localizer frequency is tuned
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) is in LOC mode, with valid deviation indication
• Valid glideslope deviation
• APR Key is pressed
Figure 7-9 Glideslope Mode Armed
Upon reaching the glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to intercept and
track the glideslope.
Approach Autopilot Glideslope
Mode Active Engaged Mode Active
Active ILS
Frequency
Tuned
Glideslope
Indicator
Command Bars
Indicate Descent
on Localizer/
Glideslope Path
LOC2 is Active
Navigation
Receiver on HSI
Figure 7-10 Glideslope Mode
7-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND (GA) MODE
NOTE: Go Around Mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode, and the ‘GA’ annunciation appears in both the
active pitch and roll mode fields in the AFCS Status Box.
Pushing the Go Around Switch engages the flight director in a wings level, 7° pitch-up attitude, allowing
the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms
Altitude Hold Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll
Hold modes.
Go Around Mode Active
Autopilot Disconnect
Annunciation Flashes
Yellow 5 sec
Command Bars
Indicate Climb
Figure 7-11 Go Around Mode
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-13
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ROLL MODES
The GFC 700 offers the following roll modes:
• Roll Hold (default mode) – Holds the current aircraft roll attitude or rolls the wings level, depending on the
commanded bank angle
• Heading Select – Captures and tracks the Selected Heading
• Navigation (VOR, GPS, LOC, Backcourse) – Captures and tracks the selected navigation receiver on the
HSI
• Approach (VOR, GPS, ILS) – Captures and tracks the selected receiver on the HSI with greater sensitivity for
approach
• Go Around – Automatically disengages the autopilot and commands a constant pitch angle and wings level
The following table relates each roll mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the pitch modes
section for a discussion on Go Around Mode.
Roll Mode
Roll Hold
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Navigation, Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
Go Around
Control
(default)
HDG Key
NAV Key
APR Key
Annunciation
ROL
HDG
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VAPP
LOC
Go Around Switch
GA
Table 7-2 Roll Modes
7-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
When the flight director is activated (the FD or AP Key is pressed), Roll Hold Mode is selected by default.
This mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box.
Figure 7-12 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed in Table 7-3.
Bank Angle
Flight Director Response
< 6°
Rolls wings level
6° to 22° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
> 22°
Limits bank to 22°
Table 7-3 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-15
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading upon release of the CWS Button.
NOTE: Press the HDG Knob (the SYNC function) to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current
heading.
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. The annunciation ‘HDG’ appears in the AFCS
Status Box to indicate Heading Select Mode. This mode acquires and maintains the Selected Heading shown
on the PFD. The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob on the PFD or MFD. The adjustment is
shown by the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the Bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Heading Select
Mode Active
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Command Bars
Track Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Figure 7-13 Heading Select Mode
7-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC) MODE
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid signal (VOR, LOC) or active GPS course in order for
the flight director to enter Navigation or Approach Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director will give commands to capture the active leg
at approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
will not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation or Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight
plan) when the CWS Button is released.
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
Pressing the NAV Key activates Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The mode annunciation in the AFCS Status Box indicates
the selected navigation receiver. The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when the HSI is in
GPS mode, and creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when the HSI is in
VOR or LOC mode. The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Navigation Mode can be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC approaches where glideslope tracking is
not required. Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105°
from the aircraft heading. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation
Mode.
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
Flight Level
Change
Mode Active
Altitude Hold
Mode Armed
Command Bars
Indicate Left
Turn to Track
GPS Course and
Climb to Intercept
Selected Altitude
Selected Course
GPS is Active
Navigation
Receiver on HSI
Figure 7-14 Navigation Mode
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-17
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH (GPS, VAPP, LOC) MODE
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The mode annunciation corresponding to the selected
navigation receiver (with the exception of VOR, which is annunciated ‘VAPP’ to indicate VOR Approach
Mode) is displayed in the AFCS Status Box. This mode uses the selected navigation receiver deviation and
desired course inputs to fly the approach.
Approach Mode provides greater sensitivity for VOR tracking than Navigation Mode and allows the autopilot
to fly an ILS approach with a glideslope. Glideslope Mode is automatically armed when LOC Approach Mode
is selected.
Approach Mode Active
Glideslope Mode Active
Command Bars
Indicate Descent
on Localizer/
Glideslope Path
LOC2 is Active
Navigation
Receiver on HSI
Figure 7-16 Approach Mode
NAVIGATION/APPROACH MODE ARMED
NOTE: If the NAV radio is tuned to a different VOR while in VOR Navigation Mode, the flight director reverts
to Roll Hold Mode (wings level) and arms VOR Navigation Mode.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when Navigation or Approach Mode
is selected, the selected mode is automatically armed.
Figure 7-15 Navigation/Approach Mode Armed
The flight director remains in the active roll mode until entering capture phase, at which point Navigation
or Approach Mode is annunciated as the active roll mode in green.
7-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 AUTOPILOT OPERATION
The Columbia 350/400’s autopilot operates flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control.
The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director.
Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim adapter to relieve any sustained effort required by the
pitch servo.
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the GSA 81 servos, based on the active flight director modes. Servo
motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque.
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim adapter. The pitch trim adapter commands the motor to reduce the
average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim adapter may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated with the MET Switch. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more
consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
EMERGENCY CONTROL OVERRIDE
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The GSM 85 servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to
be overridden in case of an emergency.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-19
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already engaged) are activated. Engagement
is indicated by a green ‘AP’ annunciation in the center of the AFCS Status Box. The flight director engages in
Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated.
Autopilot Engaged
Figure 7-17 Autopilot Engaged
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS
maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.
Control Wheel Steering
Figure 7-18 CWS Annunciation
7-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director
modes (FD also disengages automatically)
• Stall warning
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MET Switch.
Autopilot Automatically Disengaged
Figure 7-19 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
The autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC or Go Around Switch or the AP Key
on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a
two-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. The AP DISC or MET Switch may be used to cancel the aural
alert.
Autopilot Manually Disengaged
Figure 7-20 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-21
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 EXAMPLE PROCEDURES
NOTE: The diagrams in this section are for instructional purposes only and should not be used for
navigation.
This section provides a scenario-based set of procedures showing various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during
a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Reid-Hillview Airport (KRHV) from runway 13L, enroute to Fresno
Yosemite International Airport (KFAT). Per the filed flight plan, the aircraft climbs to an altitude of 7000 feet MSL
at a heading of 070° to intercept airway V107.
Airway V107 is flown to Panoche VORTAC (PXN) using VOR navigation, then airway V230 is flown using a
GPS flight plan. On this leg, the aircraft descends to 3000 feet prior to reaching Clovis VORTAC (CZQ) and the
ILS approach to R29R at KFAT is loaded. The ILS approach is flown and a missed approach is executed.
KRHV
070
33
0
27
30
6
27
9
24
3
V 230
6
Clovis�
VORTAC
(CZQ)
0
33
3
30
V1
07
21
15
18
12
21
24
12
9
Panoche�
VORTAC
(PXN)
15
18
KFAT
Figure 7-21 Flight Plan Overview
7-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Upon takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 7000 feet using the ALT Knob.
To have the autopilot capture this altitude, use Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. In this
example, Vertical Speed Mode is used.
2) Upon reaching the desired vertical speed of 1000 fpm, enable the flight director in Vertical Speed Mode.
a) Press the VS Key. Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically.
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in Roll Hold and Vertical Speed modes
3) Activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb.
a) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading to 070°.
b) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the
desired heading.
4) As the aircraft climbs to the Selected Altitude, the flight director changes from Vertical Speed to Altitude Hold
Mode. This active mode change is indicated by the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashing for ten seconds.
5) Upon reaching the Selected Altitude, the autopilot completes the capture process and levels the aircraft. From
this point, the flight director continues to operate in Altitude Hold Mode.
070
HDG Mode
3.
Selected Altitude of 7,000 MSL
5. ALT Mode
4.
1.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
2.
od
VS M
T
e, AL
eA
Mod
rmed
Figure 7-22 Departure
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-23
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V107 to Panoche
VORTAC (PXN) should now be intercepted.
Intercepting a VOR:
1) Tune the VOR frequency and activate Navigation Mode.
a) Use the CDI Softkey to set the HSI navigation source to VOR.
b) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 116°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in
Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 070°.
c) Press the NAV Key to arm Navigation Mode. The white annunciation ‘VOR’ appears as the armed roll mode.
2) When the CDI shows less than one dot, the flight director changes from Heading Select to Navigation Mode,
and the green annunciation ‘VOR’ flashes. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
V
10
7
070
HDG Mode, VOR
1.
Armed
2.
3.
VO
RM
od
e
0
33
6
6
27
3
30
29
24
9
Panoche�
VORTAC�
(PXN)
21
12
15
18
Figure 7-23 Intercepting a VOR
7-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the HSI navigation mode cancels the flight director’s Navigation Mode and causes the
flight director to automatically revert to Roll Hold Mode, wings level.
As the aircraft closes on Panoche VORTAC, a GPS flight plan is entered for the next leg, airway V230. To do
this, PXN, CZQ, and KFAT are entered into the active flight plan.
The aircraft is currently tracking inbound on the 116° radial of Panoche VORTAC.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
1) Enter Panoche VORTAC (PXN) and Clovis VORTAC (CZQ) into the GPS flight plan, in preparation to intercept this
leg.
2) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode.
a) Use the CDI Softkey to put the HSI in GPS mode. This cancels VOR mode on the HSI and the flight director loses
the VOR signal. As a result, the VOR annunciation flashes yellow as the autopilot rolls the wings level.
Flashes 10 sec, Transitions to Roll Hold
Mode Unless NAV Key is Pressed
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode and cause the autopilot to steer the aircraft toward the
active flight plan leg.
If the NAV Key is not pressed within ten seconds of the VOR signal loss, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold
Mode
3) Once the flight plan leg is intercepted, the autopilot continues to track GPS guidance to the end of the flight
plan.
0
3
30
33
1.
27
2.
0
24
12
21
27
V 230
g
lan Le
light P
GPS F
9
Panoche�
VORTAC
(PXN)
12
21
24
3.
e
6
Mod
18
GPS
9
Clovis�
VORTAC
(CZQ)
3
30
33
15
e
6
VO
RM
od
15
18
Figure 7-24 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-25
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE DESCENT
While flying the GPS leg from Panoche VORTAC to Clovis VORTAC, the aircraft is cleared to make a descent
to 3000 feet in preparation for the approach to KFAT.
Making a Flight Level Change descent:
1) Enter Flight Level Change Mode.
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 3000 feet.
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed, 142 knots. Altitude Hold Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
3) Upon capturing the Selected Altitude, the flight director changes from Flight Level Change to Altitude Hold
Mode. The annunciation ‘ALT’ flashes in green to indicate the altitude capture. After the capture is complete,
the autopilot holds the aircraft level at the Selected Altitude.
1.
Cruise Altitude of 7,000 MSL
2.
FLC M
ode
3.
Selected Altitude of 3,000 MSL
ALT Hold Mode
Figure 7-25 FLC Descent
7-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ILS APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Load the Runway 29R ILS approach for KFAT into the Flight Plan and select ‘Vectors to Final’ for the transition.
b) Set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC and press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft
to the desired heading.
2) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
3) In preparation for approach, tune the localizer frequency and select LOC mode on the HSI.
4) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
The autopilot and flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course.
5) The autopilot flies the ILS Approach. At the Decision Height, there are two options:
a) Push the AP DISC Switch and land the aircraft
OR:
b) Use the Go Around Switch to execute a missed approach (refer to the following procedure).
0
3
30
33
27
24
12
21
15
1.
9
ourse
GPS C
6
Clovis
VORTAC
(CZQ)
18
29
0
2
12
KFAT
G
HD
e
od
M
LO
C/G
SM
5.
02
5
od
e
HILAN
2.
Figure 7-26 ILS Approach to KFAT
190-00552-00 Rev. A
11
0
4.
3.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
075
7-27
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of the calculations being performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the
display may re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern.
Flying a missed approach:
1) Push the Go Around Switch at the Decision Height and apply full power to execute a missed approach. The
Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow.
Note that when the Go Around Switch is pushed, the autopilot disconnects and the ‘AP’ annunciation flashes
yellow for five seconds.
Flashes 5 sec
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure.
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
b) Select the CDI Softkey to set the HSI to GPS navigation mode.
c) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
d) Select the SUSP Softkey to resume sequencing approach legs to the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP). The
autopilot flies direct to Clovis VORTAC according to the loaded approach.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold. The CWS Button may be used to set a new pitch attitude.
As the Selected Altitude is captured, Altitude Hold Mode becomes active and the autopilot maintains the
Selected Altitude.
4) To use the autopilot to fly the hold, set the Selected Heading using the HDG Knob and press the HDG Key. Use
the HDG Knob to guide the aircraft for the remainder of the hold.
7-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3
6
7
12
27
HD
0
33
30
e
od
GM
CZQ
9
24
4.
12
21
15
18
SM
GP
e
od
3.
2.
KFAT
GA
Mo
1.
de
Figure 7-27 Go Around/Missed Approach
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-29
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
NOTE: Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests as this may cause
the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled
to the servos to remedy the situation.
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the Airspeed
and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation occurs at a time, and messages are prioritized by criticality.
AFCS Status
Annunciation
Figure 7-34 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Annunciation
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Ensure Slip/Skid Indicator centered; observe maximum fuel imbalance limits
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch servo providing sustained force
Apply nose-down/up control stick force upon AP disconnect
Pitch Trim Failure
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
Preflight Test
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-4 AFCS Status Alerts
7-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
While in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode, airspeed is monitored by the flight director.
In these modes, commands are limited for overspeed protection. Overspeed protection is provided to ensure the
flight director cannot command an attitude which would exceed the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
When an autopilot overspeed warning occurs, the Airspeed Reference box appears above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-29 Overspeed Annunciation
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
7-31
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
7-32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section for more information about XM Weather products.
NOTE: The DONE Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69(A)
activation data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation,
but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev F or later) for further information.
This section describes additional features offered with the G1000 System. The optional XM Radio entertainment
feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is explained here, along with elementary diagnostic checks of the
system in case of problems. Entertainment audio is not available with the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
8.1 GDL 69A DATA LINK RECEIVER – XM DIGITAL AUDIO
ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
Digital audio entertainment is available through the XM Satellite Radio Service, received by the GDL 69A
Data Link Receiver. XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without
having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based
transmissions.
DATA AND AUDIO RADIO ID
Each Data Link Receiver contains a unique Data Radio ID and Audio Radio IDs that allow XM to communicate
with the radio. The owner must activate XM service by providing the appropriate Radio ID(s) to XM to
authorize the installed services for that radio. If XM services have not been activated, all the weather product
boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow ‘Activation Required’ messages shows up in the
center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group).
SERVICE CLASS
The ‘Service Class’ refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
WEATHER PRODUCTS WINDOW
The Weather Products Window shows the list of available weather products and indicates the selected
products for the current subscription. The boxes for active weather products are filled. Before activation, all
boxes are clear.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
8-1
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
XM INFORMATION PAGE
The XM Information Page provides XM Radio identification numbers, service level, and weather products
(Figure 8-1).
Selecting the XM Information Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - XM Page. Radio and Info Softkeys are displayed.
3) Select the INFO Softkey to show the XM Information Page where information about the XM Satellite Radio
feature is displayed.
4) Select the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where the audio entertainment is controlled.
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
INFO
Softkey
RADIO
Softkey
Figure 8-1 XM Information Page
8-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
DONE Softkey.
Used to save
activation data
during initial setup.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
XM RADIO PAGE
The XM Radio Page (Figure 8-2) provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the
XM Satellite Radio.
Active
Channels
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
Figure 8-2 XM Radio Page
XM RADIO SOFTKEYS
The following XM Radio Softkeys are located below the display and provide control of the Data Link
Receiver:
RADIO – Select the RADIO Softkey to access the XM Satellite Radio Audio Functions.
INFO – Select the INFO Softkey to show XM Information, such as Radio IDs, Service Class, and Weather
Products.
DONE – The DONE Softkey is used during the activation process.
CHNL – Select the CHNL Softkey to allow selection of radio channels.
CATGRY – Select the CATGRY Softkey to allow selection of radio categories (Figure 8-3).
VOL – Select the VOL Softkey to adjust the audio volume or to mute the audio (Figure 8-4).
PRESETS – Select the PRESETS Softkey to access preset channels (PS1 - PS15) or to set a new preset
(SET).
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
8-3
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ACTIVE CHANNEL
The Active Channel field on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio
is using. The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected category. You can step
through the channels one at a time or you may also select a channel directly by channel number.
CHANNELS
The Channels window of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected
category.
Stepping through channels one at a time:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
Or:
2) Push the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
3) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel window, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
2) Select the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel window will be highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
The ‘Category’ field of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is ‘PRESETS’ if the user desires to view what channels have been
programmed.
8-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting a category:
1) Select the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Categories’ list (Figure 8-3). Highlight the desired category with the
small FMS Knob and press the ENT Key. Selecting ‘All Categories’ places the channels from ‘All Categories’ in
the Channels field (select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories).
Figure 8-3 Categories List
VOLUME
The Volume ‘control’ (Figure 8-4) sets the audio volume level, as well as mutes the audio. Selecting the
VOL Softkey brings up the volume bar graph, MUTE Softkey, and the volume control softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the VOL Softkey.
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob). Selecting the MUTE Softkey
toggles the muting of the radio audio volume.
Figure 8-4 Volume Control
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
8-5
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channel can then be
selected directly and added to the Active Channel list for listening.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page while listening to the Active Channel that you want to assign as a preset, select the
PRESETS Softkey.
2) Select the SET Softkey.
3) Select the preset key (PS1 - PS15) to assign a number to the active channel. Select the MORE Softkey as
necessary.
DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the Data Link Receiver to correct any hardware
problems, some quick troubleshooting steps can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
First, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed
to XM Radio, and that the XM subscription has been activated. Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers
to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver. If a failure still exists, review the messages listed in
Table 8-1. The advisory messages may provide insight to a possible failure.
For troubleshooting purposes, the Status, Serial Number, and Software Version numbers for the Data Link
Receiver are displayed in the LRU Information Box on the System Status Page (Figure 8-5).
8-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting the System Status Page:
1.) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Figure 8-5 LRU Information on System Status Page
Alerts Window Message
CHECK ANTENNA
Comment
Data Link Receiver antenna error, service is required
UPDATING
Data Link Receiver is updating Encryption Code
Loss of Signal Message appears on XM Radio Page and on Weather Data Link Page,
when the signal strength is too low for the receiver
Acquiring Channel Audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing Channel Information
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
--WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
GDL69 CONFIG
GDL69 FAIL
No communication with the Data Link Receiver within the last five minutes
XM Data Link Receiver is not activated
Data Link Receiver configuration error, service is required
Data Link Receiver has failed, service is required
Table 8-1 Advisory Messages
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
8-7
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
BLANK PAGE
8-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Columbia 350/400. Red annunciation window text
signifies warnings; yellow, cautions; and white, annunciation advisories. Warning voice alerts repeat continuously
until acknowledged by selecting the ALERTS (WARNING) Softkey. Caution voice alerts repeat three times or
until acknowledged by selecting the ALERTS (CAUTION) Softkey. See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for
recommended pilot actions.
Annunciation Window Text
DOOR OPEN
FUEL VALVE
L BUS OFF
R BUS OFF
CO LVL HIGH
OIL PRES LOW
L ALT OFF
R ALT OFF
FUEL PUMP
L LOW FUEL
R LOW FUEL
RUDR LMTR*
STARTER ENGD
OXYGEN
OXYGEN PRES
OXYGEN QTY
OXYGEN ON
SPEED BRAKES
RUDR HOLD **
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
* Columbia 350 only
** Columbia 400 only
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Alerts Window Message
Door not secured
Fuel tank is not correctly selected or in OFF position
No power on the left bus
No power on the right bus
Carbon Monoxide level is too high
Low oil pressure
Left Alternator offline
Right Alternator offline
Fuel pump is operating
Low fuel in the left tank
Low fuel in the right tank
Rudder limiter is engaged
Starter relay has power applied
Oxygen system needs attention or is off
Pressure above 12000 ft and oxygen system off
Oxygen quantity below 250 psi.
Reminder: Turn off oxygen
Speed brakes are active
Rudder Hold is engaged
Audio Alert/Voice Message
Chime/”Door Open”
Chime/”Fuel Valve”
Chime/None
Chime/None
Chime/”Carbon Monoxide”
Chime/”Oil Pressure Low”
Single Chime/”Left Alternator Out”
Single Chime/”Right Alternator Out”
Single Chime/”Fuel Pump On”
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
Single Chime/None
None
None
None
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is
inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is
inoperative.
AVIONICS FAN – The cooling fan for remote avionics
is inoperative.
TIMER ZERO – Timer has counted down to zero.
FUEL IMBAL – Fuel imbalance is greater than 10
gallons.
LOW MAN PRES – Manifold pressure is below 15 in.
VAPOR SUPPR – Turn on Vapor Suppression.**
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
None
None
None
“Timer Expired”
None
None
None
A-1
APPENDIX A
VOICE ALERTS
NOTE: Voice alerts are provided to the G1000 by the GIA 63 #1. Should this unit fail, audio and voice alerts
are not available.
NOTE: If a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed as an option, TIS is not configured and the TIS traffic voice
alerts are not generated. Refer to the applicable TAS documentation for information on alerts generated by
the TAS equipment.
The following voice alerts can be configured for ‘Male’ or ‘Female’ gender from the MFD AUX - System Setup
Page (refer to the System Overview for more information on the System Setup Page):
Voice Alert
Alert Trigger
“Minimums, minimums” Played when the aircraft transitions through the barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA).
“Traffic”
TIS voice alert - played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued.
“Traffic Not Available” TIS voice alert - played when the traffic system fails or cannot communicate.
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure B-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63
Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63
Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
A-2
Figure A-1 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
System Annunciation
Comment
System Annunciation
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Comment
Other Various Red X
Indications
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes
GPS inputs during normal
operation. AHRS operation
may be degraded if GPS signals
are not present (see AFM).
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-3
APPENDIX A
G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
NOTE: This section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) takes precedence
over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
This section describes various G1000 System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciations section.
PFD/MFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1
configuration error. Config service
req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
MFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is
stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1
configuration module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage.
A-4
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings.
The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 System should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The G1000 System should be serviced if the problem
persists.
The PFD configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The MFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 System should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Basemap database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
version mismatch. Xtalk is off
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
database mismatch. Xtalk is off
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to
reload the aviation database. If problem persists, the G1000 System should be
serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that
the terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem
persists, The G1000 System should be serviced.
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed. Crossfill
is off. Install correct aviation database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed (Americas,
European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database type in both
displays.
The PFD and MFD have different basemap database versions installed.
Crossfill is off. Install correct basemap database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct terrain database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct terrain database type in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Crossfill
is off. Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct airport terrain database in both displays.
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable.
The G1000 System should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration
error. Config service req’d.
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio
service. Return unit for repair.
functions may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The
G1000 System should be serviced when possible.
BACKUP PATH – Audio panel 1 using The #1 audio panel is using a backup communication path. The G1000 System
backup data path.
should be serviced when possible.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-5
APPENDIX A
GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
available from FAF to MAP waypoints.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
available.
A-6
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000
System should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000
System should be serviced.
There is a hardware mismatch between GIA1 and GIA2. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.
The transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000
System should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2
may still be usable. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) for the current phase of flight.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
POSN ERROR – RAIM has
determined GPS position is in error.
DGRD GPS ACC – GPS position
accuracy degraded & RAIM
unavailable.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
When a RAIM position error is detected, GPS is flagged and the system no longer
provides GPS-based guidance.
GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The G1000 System should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
System should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
receiver may still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced when
possible.
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 System
should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
G1000 System should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 System should
be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 System should
be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-7
APPENDIX A
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – AHRS1 using
backup data path.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
Comments
The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field
model when practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading
is flagged as invalid.
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be
serviced.
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – EIS using backup
data path.
Comments
The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be
serviced.
The GEA 71 is using a backup communication path. The G1000 System should
be serviced when possible.
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – XPDR1 using
backup data path.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup
configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be
serviced.
The #1 transponder is using a backup communications path. The G1000 System
should be serviced when possible.
GDL 69 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
Comments
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 configura- GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
tion error. Config service req’d.
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The
G1000 System should be serviced
A-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GDC1 CONFIG – GDC1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – ADC1 using backup
data path.
Comments
GDC 74A configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be
serviced.
The GDC 74A is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System
should be serviced when possible.
GCU 476 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GCU CNFG – GCU config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.
GCU PATH – A GCU path has failed.
Comments
GCU 476 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.
The GCU 476 has failed. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.
The GCU 476 is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System
should be serviced when possible.
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan
waypoint is locked.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
waypoint moved.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
APPR VPROF – Approaching VNAV
profile.
APPR TRG ALT – Approaching target
altitude.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Comments
Upon power-up, the G1000 System detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
locked. This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this
message. This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
Update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
aviation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been
manually edited. This alert is issued only after an aviation database update.
Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up
to date.
This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is
removed from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
Aircraft is approaching VNAV profile. Prepare to climb or descend to meet VNAV
profile.
Aircraft is approaching target altitude. Prepare to level aircraft.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan
with current waypoint.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-9
APPENDIX A
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
LEG UNSMOOTH – Flight plan leg
will not be smooth.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
BACKUP PATH – Stormscope using
backup path.
A-10
Comments
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The approaching flight plan waypoints are too close to allow for smooth turns.
Prepare for steep turns ahead and expect noticeable course deviations.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate
NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the
CDI to the correct NAV receiver.
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check
position with alternate navigation sources.
The traffic information system TIS has failed. The G1000 System should be
serviced.
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 System should be serviced.
Stormscope is using the backup communication path. The G1000 System should
be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
AFCS ALERTS
NOTE: Do not press the AP DISC switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests as this may cause
the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled
to the servos to remedy the situation.
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) appear in the AFCS Status Field. Only one
indication occurs at a time, and messages are prioritized by criticality.
AFCS Status Field
Figure A-2 AFCS Status Field
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Annunciation
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Ensure Slip/Skid Indicator centered; observe maximum fuel imbalance limits
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch servo providing sustained force
Apply nose-down/up control stick force upon AP disconnect
Pitch Trim Failure
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
Preflight Test
190-00552-00 Rev. A
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Preflight system test failed
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-11
APPENDIX A
TAWS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
Negative Climb Rate Caution
(NCR)
A-12
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
or
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively
degraded GPS signal
System Test in progress
None
“TAWS Not Available”
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
System Test pass
190-00552-00 Rev. A
None
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
A-13
APPENDIX A
BLANK PAGE
A-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SD CARD USE
The G1000 System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight
operations, SD cards are required for terrain database storage as well as aviation database updates.
AVIATION DATABASE
Jeppesen aviation databases are released every 28 days, and are provided directly to the pilot by Jeppesen.
Updates must be loaded to both the MFD and PFD using an aviation database update SD card provided by
Jeppesen. The card reader downloads the aviation database files and stores them in the PFD and MFD internal
memory.
NOTE: The display downloads the aviation database and stores it internally. The aviation database SD card
is not required to remain in the display after the update.
Updating the Jeppesen aviation database:
1) With the G1000 System OFF, insert the aviation database update SD card into the top card slot of the PFD (Label
of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the G1000 System ON. This prompt is displayed on the upper left corner of the PFD:
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the database updated. This prompt is displayed:
4) After the update completes, the PFD starts in normal mode. Remove the aviation database update SD card from
the PFD.
5) Turn the G1000 System OFF.
6) Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD. The MFD and PFD aviation databases are now updated.
7) Verify that the correct update cycle is loaded during startup of the MFD.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
B-1
APPENDIX B
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATABASES
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
NOTE: Obstacles 200’ and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not
all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database.
G1000 topography, terrain, and obstacle data is stored on a Supplemental Data Card provided by Garmin.
The obstacle database update cycle is every 56 days. The terrain database is updated less often, and on an
irregular basis. Since these databases are not stored internally in the MFD or PFD, Supplemental Data Cards
containing identical database versions must be kept in both displays to retain terrain and obstacle data. A
Supplemental Data Card should be inserted into the bottom card slot of the PFD and MFD.
NOTE: If the Supplemental Data Card is removed from the display, the TOPO and TERRAIN softkeys are
not functional and are grayed out on the MFD Map Page.
The obstacle and terrain database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailing in the
‘Aviation Databases’ section of the Garmin website (www.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been
downloaded from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and
program the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the
update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended).
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader.
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website.
• Existing 010-00330-41 Supplemental Database SD Cards from both PFD and MFD.
B-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
After the data has been copied to both data cards, perform the following steps:
1) Insert one card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of the PFD.
2) Apply power to the G1000 System. View the MFD power-up splash screen. Check that the Terrain and Obstacle
databases are initialized and displayed on the scrolling window of the splash screen.
3) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
4) At the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP page, select the MAP Softkey and check to make sure that the TOPO and
TERRAIN softkeys are functional (not grayed out).
5) Power down the G1000.
Figure B-1 Power-Up Splash Screen Window
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
B-3
APPENDIX B
BLANK PAGE
B-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
GLOSSARY
ACC
ACT
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ATC
ATCRBS
AUTOSEQ
AUX
accuracy
active
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
Aircraft Flight Manual
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
automatic sequence
auxiliary
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
BFO
BKSP
BRG
barometric altitude
barometer
battery
backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
C
CA
CALC
Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Calibrated Airspeed
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTRL
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
Indicated airspeed corrected for installation
and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, & Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
copilot
The line between two points to be followed
by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer in order
to reduce course error or stay on course.
Provides the most efficient heading to get
back to the desired course and proceed
along the flight plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
Course to Steer
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack Error
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
C-1
APPENDIX C
DEP
Desired Track
DF
DFLT
DGRD
Dilution of Precision
DIS
Distance
DME
DOP
DP
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Direct to Fix
default
degrade
A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality
on a scale of one to ten (lower numbers
equal better geometry, where higher
numbers equal poorer geometry)
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
disabled
Desired Track
empty
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption, expressed in
distance per unit of fuel.
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
elevation
ELEV
elevator
EMERGCY
emergency
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
ENDUR
endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight time
based on available fuel on board.
ENG
engine
ENGD
engaged
ENR
enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude
The recommended minimum altitude within
ten miles left or right of the desired course
on an active flight plan or direct-to.
ENT
enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
ERR
error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS position error
derived by satellite geometry conditions and
other factors.
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft
should reach the destination waypoint, based
upon current speed and track.
C-2
Estimated Time Enroute
ETA
ETE
EXPIRD
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FLC
FM
FMS
FOB
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
Fuel On Board
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GMA
GMT
The estimated time it takes to reach the
destination waypoint from the present
position, based upon current groundspeed.
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
expired
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of fuel
per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on board the
aircraft.
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
GMU
GND
gph
GPS
Grid MORA
Groundspeed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; one
degree latitude by one degree longitude
in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1000 feet for
all areas of the grid
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground speed
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
Heading
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based
upon indications from a magnetic compass
or a properly set directional gyro.
HF
Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg
mercury
HI
high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
hPa
hectopascal
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s
horizontal position.
hr
hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT
heat
HUL
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz
Hertz
I
IAF
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial gallon
Instrument Landing System
IMC
in
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
inch
inactive
increase fuel
indicated
Information provided by properly calibrated
and set instrumentation on the aircraft panel.
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
km
kt
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
L
LAT
LBL
lb
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel On Board
LIFR
LO
LOC
LON
LRU
LTNG
LVL
left
latitude
label
pound
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board after
the completion of one or more legs of a
flight plan or direct-to.
The amount of flight time remaining, based
on the amount of fuel on board after the
completion of one or more legs of a flight
plan or direct-to, and a known consumption
rate.
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
Low Instrument Flight Rules
low
localizer
longitude
Line Replacement Unit
lightning
level
M
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
Middle Marker
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Left Over Fuel Reserve
Leg
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
C-3
APPENDIX C
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MET
METAR
MEPT
MFD
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
C-4
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSL
m
mV
MVFR
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent height
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
megahertz
microphone
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NRST
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
nearest
O
OAT
OBS
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
oxygen
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POH
POHS
POSN
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
position
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
PTT
PWR
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s)
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
Push-to-Talk
power
QTY
quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
RAM
REF
REM
REQ
RES, RSV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RVRSNRY
RX
right
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reversionary
receive
SA
SAT
SCIT
SD
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
simulator
slip/skid
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
suspend
software
system
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a
ground position; also ‘Ground Track’
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
target
track
truncated
total
transmit
Track Angle Error
TRG
TRK
TRUNC
TTL
TX
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V, Vspeed
VLE
velocity (airspeed)
maximum landing gear extended speed
190-00552-00 Rev. A
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VX
VY
VYSE
VA
VAPP
VD
Vdc
VERT
Vertical Figure of Merit
VPROF
VR
VS
VSI
VSR
maximum landing gear operating speed
minimum control speed
maximum speed
never-exceed speed
rotate speed
best angle of climb speed
best rate of climb speed
best single-engine rate of climb speed
Heading Vector to Altitude
VOR approach
Heading Vector to DME Distance
volts, direct current
vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s
vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude to
a defined target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range
station and tactical air navigation
VNAV profile, vertical profile
Heading Vector to Radial
vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
W
WAAS
WARN
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
watt(s)
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
Vertical Speed Required
VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
VMC
VNAV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
C-5
APPENDIX C
BLANK PAGE
C-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
WHAT IS RAIM AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Eliminates a corrupt satellite from the navigation solution
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the INTEG annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.
WHY ARE THERE NOT ANY APPROACHES AVAILABLE FOR A FLIGHT PLAN?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN AN APPROACH IS SELECTED? CAN A FLIGHT PLAN WITH AN APPROACH, A DEPARTURE, OR AN
ARRIVAL BE STORED?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
D-1
APPENDIX D
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should
an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
CAN “SLANT GOLF” (“/G”) BE FILED USING THE G1000?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C129 Class A1 or A2
installation. Non-precision GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the approved
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
WHAT DOES THE OBS SOFTKEY DO?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
One application for the OBS Softkey is holding patterns. The OBS Softkey is used to suspend waypoint
sequencing and select the desired course along the waypoint side of the hold. For many approach operations,
setting and resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic. Holding patterns that are part of an approach
automatically disable waypoint sequencing, then re-enable waypoint sequencing after one time around the
holding pattern. To fly the holding pattern a second time, select the OBS Softkey. An example of this operation
is an approach which begins with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix (IAF).
WARNING: The G1000 does not provide guidance to the missed approach hold point (MAHP). Always
follow published missed approach procedures when flying a missed approach.
D-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a “SUSP” annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
WHY DOES THE G1000 NOT AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENCE TO THE NEXT WAYPOINT?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or
“SUSP” annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn
being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an
equal angle from each leg.
HOW CAN A WAYPOINT BE SKIPPED IN AN APPROACH, A DEPARTURE, OR AN ARRIVAL?
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
WHEN DOES TURN ANTICIPATION BEGIN?
The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
25°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (“NEXT DTK ###°”) flashes on the PFD 10 seconds before the turn point
• A flashing turn advisory (“TURN TO ###°”) appears on the PFD when the pilot is to begin the turn and the
HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next DTK value
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed
WHEN DOES THE CDI SCALE CHANGE?
When 30 nm from the destination, the G1000 begins a smooth CDI scale transition from 5.0 nm (enroute
mode) to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). When 2 nm from the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale
transitions to 0.3 nm (approach mode). When executing a missed approach, the CDI can be returned to the
1.0 nm scale by selecting the SUSP Softkey. The CDI is also set to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) within 30 nm of
the departure airport.
WHY DOES THE HSI NOT RESPOND LIKE A VOR WHEN OBS MODE IS ACTIVE?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
D-3
APPENDIX D
WHAT IS THE CORRECT MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE? HOW IS THE MISSED APPROACH HOLDING POINT SELECTED?
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
AFTER A MISSED APPROACH, HOW CAN THE SAME APPROACH BE RE-SELECTED? HOW CAN A NEW APPROACH BE
ACTIVATED?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt
from the Procedures Window (opened by pressing the PROC Key). Once the clearance is given for another
attempt, activate the approach from the Procedures Window by highlighting “Activate Approach?” using the
large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation along the desired course to the
waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure from the Procedures Window.
Choose “Select Approach?”, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport
using the FMS Knob. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
D-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
G1000 MAP DATUMS
WARNING: WGS 84 is the default datum and should be used in all situations except when another datum
is specifically required for safe navigation. Pilots using map datums other than WGS 84 do so at their own
risk.
The G1000 System supports the following map datums:
ADINDAN
AFGOOYE
AIN El ABD 1970
ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965
ARC 1950
ARC 1960
ASCENSION IS 1958
ASTRO B4 SOROL ATOLL
ASTRO BEACON “E”
ASTRO DOS 71/4
ASTRONOMIC STN 1952
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1966
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1984
AUSTRIA NS
BELGIUM 1950
BELLEVUE (IGN)
BERMUDA 1957
BOGATA OBSERVATORY
BUKIT RIMPAH
CAMP AREA ASTRO
CAMPO INCHAUSPE
CANTON ASTRO 1966
CAPE
CAPE CANAVERAL
CARTHAGE
CH-1903
CHATHAM 1971
CHUA ASTRO
CORREGO ALEGRE
DANISH GI 1934
DJAKARTA (BATAVIA)
DOS 1968
EASTER ISLAND 1967
EUROPEAN 1950
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Ethiopia, Mali, Senegal, Sudan
Somalia
Bahrain Island, Saudi Arabia
Cocos Islands
Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Swaziland, Zaire,
Zambia, Zimbabwe
Kenya, Tanzania
Ascension Island
Tern Island
Iwo Jima Island
St. Helena Island
Marcus Island
Australia, Tasmania Island
Australia, Tasmania Island
Austria
Belgium
Efate and Erromango Islands
Bermuda Islands
Colombia
Indonesia
Antarctica
Argentina
Phoenix Islands
South Africa
Florida, Bahama Islands
Tunisia
Switzerland
Chatham Island (New Zealand)
Paraguay
Brazil
Denmark
Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
Gizo Island (New Georgia Islands)
Easter Island
Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Gibraltar, Greece, Italy,
Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland
EUROPEAN 1979
FINLAND HAYFORD 1910
G. SEGARA
GANDAJIKA BASE
GEODETIC DATUM 1949
GGRS 87
GUAM 1963
GUX 1 ASTRO
HERAT NORTH
HJORSEY 1955
HONG KONG 1963
HU-TZU SHAN
INDIAN BNGLDSH NEPAL
INDIAN MEAN VALUE
INDIAN THAILAND VIETN
INDONESIA 74
IRELAND 1965
ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969
JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961
KANDAWALA
KERGUELEN ISLAND
KERTAU 1948
L.C. 5 ASTRO
LIBERIA 1964
LUZON MEAN VALUE
LUZON MINDANAO IS
LUZON PHILIPPINES
MAHE 1971
MARCO ASTRO
MASSAWA
MERCHICH
MIDWAY ASTRO 1961
MINNA
NAD27 ALASKA
NAD27 BAHAMAS
NAD27 CANADA
NAD27 CANAL ZONE
Austria, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland
Finland
Borneo
Republic of Maldives
New Zealand
Greece
Guam Island
Guadalcanal Island
Afghanistan
Iceland
Hong Kong
Taiwan
Bangladesh, India, Nepal
India
Thailand, Vietnam
Indonesia
Ireland
Diego Garcia
Johnston Island
Sri Lanka
Kerguelen Island
West Malaysia
Cayman Brac Island
Liberia
Philippines
Mindanao Island
Philippines (excluding Mindanao Island)
Mahe Island
Salvage Islands
Eritrea (Ethiopia)
Morocco
Midway Island
Nigeria
North American 1927 – Alaska
North American 1927 – Bahamas
North American 1927 – Canada
North American 1927 – Canal Zone
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
E-1
APPENDIX E
NAD27 CARIBBEAN
North American 1927 – Caribbean:
Barbados, Caicos Islands, Cuba, Dominican
Republic, Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Leeward
and Turks Islands
NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA North American 1927 – Central America:
Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala,
Honduras, and Nicaragua
NAD27 CONUS
North American 1927 – Continental United
States
NAD27 CUBA
North American 1927 – Cuba
NAD27 GREENLAND
North American 1927 – Greenland (Hayes
Peninsula)
NAD27 MEXICO
North American 1927 – Mexico
NAD27 SAN SALVADOR IS North American 1927 – San Salvador Island
NAD83
North American 1983 – Alaska, Canada,
Central America, CONUS, Mexico
NAHRWAN MASIRAH IS Masirah Island (Oman)
NAHRWAN SAUDI ARABIA Saudi Arabia
NAHRWAN UNITD ARAB E United Arab Emirates
NAPARIMA BWI
Trinidad and Tobago
NETHERLAND TRIAG ’21 Netherlands
NOU TRIAG FRANCE
France
NOU TRIAG LUXEMBOURG Luxembourg
OBSERVATORIO 1966
Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
OLD EGYPTIAN
Egypt
OLD HAWAIIAN KAUAI Kauai
OLD HAWAIIAN MAUI
Maui
OLD HAWAIIAN MEAN Mean Value
OLD HAWAIIAN OAHU
Oahu
OMAN
Oman
ORD SRV GRT BRITAIN
England, Isle of Man, Scotland, Shetland
Islands, Wales
PICO DE LAS NIEVAS
Canary Islands
E-2
PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967
PORTUGUESE 1973
POTSDAM
PROV SO AMERICA ’56
Pitcairn Island
Portugal
Germany
Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,
Peru, Venezuela
PROV SO CHILEAN 1963 South Chile
PUERTO RICO
Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
QATAR NATIONAL
Qatar
QORNOQ
South Greenland
REUNION
Mascarene Island
ROME 1940
Sardinia Island
RT 90
Sweden
SANTO (DOS)
Espirito Santo Island
SAO BRAZ
Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
SAPPER HILL 1943
East Falkland Island
SCHWARZECK
Namibia
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia,
Ecuador, Guyana, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela
SOUTH ASIAN
Singapore
SOUTHEAST BASE
Porto Santo and Madeira Islands
SOUTHWEST BASE
Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira
Islands
TANANARIVE OBSV 1925 Madagascar
TIMBALAI 1948
Brunei and East Malaysia (Sarawak and
Sabah)
TOKYO
Japan, Korea, Okinawa
TRISTAN ASTRO 1968
Tristan da Cunha
VITI LEVU 1916
Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands
WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 Marshal Islands
WGS 72
World Geodetic System 1972
WGS 84
World Geodetic System 1984
YACARE
Uruguay
ZANDERIJ
Surinam
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped
aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track
reports to generate traffic notification. The G1000 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map
Page of the MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as
well as on the PFD Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G1000 System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below,
to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
TIS VS. TAS/TCAS
The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory (TAS) or Traffic
Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator
with a half-second update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying
data link to provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
TIS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meterorlogical conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more
comprehensive explanation.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system
similar to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information
provided by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only
to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful
aid for visual traffic avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended
avoidance maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar
antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the groundbased radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
• Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
F-1
APPENDIX F
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations
is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in
mountainous regions.
TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five
seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay.
These algorithms use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of
display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on
the Traffic Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and target track vector. This can cause a delay in
the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate
and may be used to assist in spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display
the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder
aircraft course stabilizes.
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of
the aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and
transponder software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC,
malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
F-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX G
MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORT
BASEMAP
Item
Symbol
Item
Symbol
Item
Symbol
Interstate Highway
Unknown Airport
State Highway
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
US Highway
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
National Highway
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Small City or Town
Towered, Serviced Airport
Medium City
Restricted (Private) Airport
Large City
Heliport
TRAFFIC
NAVAIDS
Item
Symbol
Intersection
Non-Threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Traffic Advisory
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
LIGHTNING STRIKE
Item
Symbol
Lightning Strike (0-6 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (6-20 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (20-60 sec ago)
Lightning Strike (60-120 sec ago)
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
G-1
APPENDIX G
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
State or Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Latitude/Longitude
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Obstacle Symbol
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL
Obstacle
Color
Obstacle Location
Red
(WARNING)
Obstacle within 100 ft or
above aircraft altitude
Yellow
(CAUTION)
Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude
Gray
Obstacle more than 1000
(NO DANGER) ft below aircraft altitude
Table G-1 Obstacle Symbols and Colors
G-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX G
TERRAIN PROXIMITY COLOR CHART
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft AGL
Terrain Color
Red (WARNING)
Yellow (CAUTION)
Black (NO DANGER)
Terrain Location
Terrain at or within 100 ft below aircraft altitude
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft of aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Figure G-1 Terrain Proximity Colors
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
Symbol
Item
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Terrain Proximity Enabled
Map Pointer
Traffic Enabled
Elevation Pointer
User Waypoint
Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector
Symbol
Overzoom Indicator
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
G-3
APPENDIX G
BLANK PAGE
G-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
190-00552-00 Rev. A
INDEX
360 HSI
D-1
5-22, 5-23,
A
5-24, 5-46
Information
4-28
Active channel, XM Radio
8-4, 8-6
Load
5-22–5-24,
Active frequency
4-14, 4-19
5-81, 5-82
6-10
Age stamp, weather product
Missed
D-2–D-4
Aileron trim
3-2, 3-4
Remove
5-28, 5-37
Aircraft heading data
6-27
Select
5-23, 5-41,
AIRMET
6-17
5-45
Airport
Approach
Mode
(GPS,
VAPP,
LOC)
5-80, 5-82
Frequency
7-12, 7-18,
Information
4-27, 5-80,
7-27
5-81, 5-86,
Arc
HSI
2-10–2-11
5-96, 6-21
Arrival
Nearest
1-33, 4-26,
Load
5-24–5-25,
4-30, 5-80–55-36
83, 5-95–5-96
Remove
5-28, 5-37
Runway
5-51, 5-82
Select
5-44
Airspace
4-32
ARTCC
frequency
Boundary
5-129
Assist,
engine
leaning
3-8–3-10
Messages
5-94
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
Nearest
5-93–5-94
1-4, 1-8,
Airspeed Indicator
2-2, 2-4–2-5
1-11–1-12
Airspeed Reference
7-11, 7-26,
Attitude
Indicator
2-2, 2-6–2-7
7-31
Audio
Panel
1-2, 1-10
2-4
Airspeed Trend Vector
Controls
4-2–4-3,
Air Data Computer (ADC)
1-3
4-5–4-12
Alerts
A-1
Auto-tuning frequencies
4-25–4-34
Airspace
1-30
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)
1-30
Arrival
1-1, 7-1–7-32
Audio voice
1-31, A-2
Alerts
and
annunciations
7-31–7-32,
Aural messages, TAWS
6-51–6-52
A-11
Window
2-3, 2-20
Controls
7-2–7-3
Alternator current (ALT AMPS) 3-4
Example procedures
7-22–7-29
Altimeter
2-2, 2-7–2-8
Status Box
7-4
Barometric setting
2-2, 2-8
Status Field
A-11
Altitude alerting
2-23
Automatic
squelch
4-21
Altitude buffer
1-30
Automatic
waypoint
sequencing
D-3
7-9, 7-23,
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
Autopilot
7-1, 7-19–77-26, 7-28
20
Altitude Reference
7-9
7-3, 7-13,
Altitude, Selected
2-2, 2-8, 2-23, Autopilot disconnect
7-21, 7-28
7-7, 7-9, 7-23
Auto
zoom
5-116
2-7
Altitude Trend Vector
1-24
Auxiliary
Pages
(AUX)
Ammeter
3-4
Aviation
map
data
5-128–5-129,
Annunciations
B-1
G1000 System
1-12, A-2
Softkey
2-21
B
1-34
Test tone
Window
2-3, 2-21
Backcourse Mode (BC)
7-17
Backlighting
1-37
Annunciator lights, Audio Panel 4-4
190-00552-00 Rev. A
2-10
Approach
Activate
Barometric minimum descent altitude
23, 2-19, 2-24
Barometric setting, Altimeter 2-2, 2-8
Battery current (BATT AMPS) 3-4
5-138
Bearing/distance, measuring
Bearing Information Windows 2-3, 2-15–216
Bearing pointers
2-15–2-16
Bearing sources
2-15–2-16
3-4
Bus voltage (BUS VOLTS)
C
Carbon monoxide detection
Cell data, storm
Channels, XM Radio
Checklists
City forecast data
Clearance recorder
Command Bars, flight director
Communication transceivers
Channel spacing
Selecting
Tuning
COM frequency
Auto-tuning
Channel spacing
Select
Tuning
COM Frequency Box
3-6
6-2
8-3–8-4
1-35–1-36
6-9
4-12
7-5
4-5–4-6
1-33
4-21
4-19
4-14, 4-22
4-26, 4-28,
4-30, 4-32
4-20
5-96
4-18–4-19
2-2, 4-13–414
Controls
Audio Panel
NAV/COM
PFD/MFD
4-2
4-15
1-13–1-14,
1-22
Softkeys
1-17–1-20
Transponder
4-35
Control Wheel Steering (CWS) 7-3, 7-20
Convective SIGMET
6-17
6-9
County warnings
Course, adjusting
2-11, 2-13
Course, Selected
2-3, 2-11
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 1-32–1-33, 210, 2-14–2-15
Changing scale
D-3
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)
3-2, 3-4, 3-7
D
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
I-1
INDEX
Databases
Data Bar fields, MFD
Data entry
Data Link Receiver
Date and time
Declutter
EIS
Levels
Departure
Load
Procedures
Remove
Select
Timer
Digital audio entertainment
Dilution of Precision (DOP)
Direct-to navigation
Cancel
Select course
Display backup
Display controls
1-7, 1-8, 1-34,
B-1
1-31
1-21–1-22
1-4
1-28
1-17, 1-20,
5-142
1-20, 3-7
5-133
5-19–5-20,
5-35
5-55
5-28, 5-37
5-20, 5-39,
5-40, 5-43
5-102
8-1
5-105
5-8–5-9, 5-96
5-6
5-5
1-10
1-13–1-20
E
ECHO TOP
6-15
5-98
Efficiency, fuel
Electronic checklists
1-35–1-36
3-2, 3-4
Elevator trim
Emergency frequency
4-15, 4-22
Endurance
3-4, 3-6, 5-98
1-3
Engine Airframe Unit
Engine Indication System (EIS) 3-1–3-10
Engine leaning assist
3-8–3-10
Engine Manifold Pressure (MAN IN HG)
3-2, 3-4
Entertainment inputs
4-11
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)
5-105
Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert
6-49
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT °F)
3-2, 3-4, 3-7,
3-8–3-9
F
Five-hundred Aural Alert
Flight director
Limitations
I-2
6-49
7-1, 7-4–7-5
7-5
Pitch modes
Roll modes
Flight ID reporting
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)
7-7–7-13
7-14–7-31
4-36
7-11, 7-26,
7-31
Flight phase annunciation, HSI 2-14
Flight plan
Active
5-16–5-28,
5-128
5-18
Add waypoint
Catalog
5-10–5-11
Change displayed data fields 5-29, 5-38
Closest point to reference
5-28, 5-37
Delete
5-27
Invert
5-27, 5-34
Maps
6-9
Restore displayed data fields 5-38
Storing
D-1
1-25
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Flight timer
5-102
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FTLA)
6-45
6-9
Freezing Levels
Frequency
Airport
5-93, 5-94
Auto-tuning
4-25–4-34
COM
4-14, 4-22,
5-96
Spacing
4-20, 4-23
4-15, 4-16,
Transfer
4-18–4-19
Tuning
4-18–4-19
5-86
VOR
D-1
Frequently asked questions
6-19
FRZ LVL softkey
FSS frequency
4-32
Fuel
5-98
Efficiency
Planning
5-99–5-100,
5-140
Range ring
5-121
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)
3-2, 3-4, 3-8
3-6
Fuel flow totalizer
Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL) 3-2, 3-4
Fuel remaining, calculated (GAL REM)
3-4, 3-6
Fuel used, calculated (GAL USED)3-4, 3-6
G
Generic timer
2-19, 5101–5-102
GFC 700 AFCS
Glideslope Indicator
Glideslope Mode (GS)
7-1–7-32
2-3, 2-9
7-3, 7-12,
7-18, 7-27
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation
5-2–5-107,
5-8–5-113
Receiver
5-106
Signal strength
5-106
Status
5-104–5-106,
5-108–5-110
Go Around Mode (GA)
7-3, 7-13,
7-28
Graphical weather data
6-9
Ground clutter
6-24
H
Heading
2-2, 2-11,
6-27
2-3, 2-11,
Heading, Selected
7-16, 7-23,
7-27, 7-28
Heading Select Mode (HDG)
7-16, 7-23,
7-27, 7-28
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
22, 2-10–2-16
Hurricane Track
6-9
I
Icing
ID indication
IFR conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI)
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI)
Inhibit, TAWS
Inset Map
Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)
INTEG annunciation, HSI
Intercom system (ICS)
Intersection
Information
Nearest
6-17
4-17, 4-23
6-17
6-46, 6-51,
A-12
6-46
6-45
2-3, 5-140–5141
1-3
2-12
4-9–4-11
5-69–5-70
5-83
J
Jeppesen aviation database
B-1
L
Land map data
Legend, weather
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
5-116, 5-130
6-18
190-00552-00 Rev. A
INDEX
Lighted obstacle
Lightning
Lightning strike symbols
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
Localized SIGMET
Long-range planning
LRU Information
6-44
6-4
6-2
1-2–1-5
6-17
6-1
8-6
M
Manual Electric Trim (MET)
7-1, 7-3, 7-19
Manual squelch (MAN SQ)
4-10
Map datums
1-29, E-1–E-2
Map Pages (MAP)
1-23, 6-6
Map panning
5-133, 6-14
Map scale
5-132, 6-30
Map symbols
G-1
Marker beacon
Annunciations
2-3, 2-23
Receiver
4-7–4-8
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) 4-8, 4-10
Measurement units, changing displayed
1-29
Menus
1-21
Messages
Airspace
5-94
A-4–A-10
G1000 Advisories
Reminder
5-103
METAR
6-21
2-7–2-8
Metric display, Altimeter
MFD/PFD Control Unit
1-15–1-16,
1-21–1-22
MFD Data Bar fields
1-31
Microphone stuck
4-22
Minimum descent altitude
2-3, 2-24
Missed approach
D-2–D-4
4-35–4-37,
Mode S Transponder
4-38
Morse code identifier
4-17, 4-23
6-17
Mountain obscuration
Multi Function Display (MFD) 1-2
Controls
1-13–1-14
Softkeys
1-20
N
National Weather Service
6-19
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box 2-2
5-7, 5-132–5Navigation Map Page
142, 6-1, 6-3
Setup
5-113–5-127
190-00552-00 Rev. A
Navigation Mode (VOR, GPS, LOC, BC)
7-17, 7-18,
7-24, 7-25,
7-28
4-8
Navigation radios
Selection
4-24
Navigation source
2-12–2-13,
4-24
Navigation Status Box
1-31, 2-2
4-14
NAV frequency
Auto-tuning
4-28, 4-30, 431, 4-33–4-34
Range
4-23
Tuning
4-18–4-19
4-13–4-14
NAV Frequency Box
NDB
Nearest
5-84
Nearest
Airports
1-33, 4-26,
4-30, 5-75,
5-79–5-82
Airspaces
5-92–5-93
4-32
Frequencies
Intersection
5-83
NDB
5-84
VOR
4-31, 5-85–586
1-24, 6-9
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff (NCR)
6-49
NEXRAD
6-1, 6-9
Abnormalities
6-24
Limitations
6-10
1-9
Normal display operation
4-6
Passenger address (PA)
PFD/MFD annunciations
6-50
Pilot Controlled Lighting frequency
4-28
1-27–1-28
Pilot profiles
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)
7-8, 7-31
Pitch indication
2-6
7-7–7-13
Pitch modes, flight director
Pitch Reference
7-8
Power-up
4-4
Audio Panel
G1000 System
1-8
TIS test
6-30
Power-up splash screen
1-8
Premature Descent Alert (PDA) 6-48
Presets, XM Radio channel
8-6
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
1-2
Controls
1-13–1-14
1-17–1-19
Softkeys
Procedures
1-25, 4-33,
5-43–5-46,
5-44–5-47,
5-45–5-48
7-22–7-29
Procedure examples, AFCS
Procedure Loading Pages (PROC) 1-25
Proximity Advisories
6-25
R
Radar coverage
Radio indications
Range
6-15
4-17, 4-23
3-4, 5-99,
5-118
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RAIM)
5-105–5-106,
O
D-1
OBS Mode
2-13, D-2–D-3 Reminder messages
5-103
Obstacles
5-121, 6-44, Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
A-6
6-46, 6-51,
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)
3-2, 3-4
A-12
3-2, 3-4
1-10, 4-12
Oil Temperature (OIL °F)
Reversionary Mode, display
Orientation, map
5-115
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)
7-3, 7-15
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 2-2, 2-17
Roll indication
2-7
7-14–7-17
Overspeed protection, autopilot 7-31
Roll modes, flight director
Oxygen Outlet Pressure (OXY OUTLET PSI) 3-4 Roll Reference
7-15
Oxygen Quantity (OXY QTY PSI) 3-4
Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) 6-46
Runway
P
Information
5-80, 5-82,
5-86
Page groups
1-22–1-25
Minimum
length
1-33
1-21
Page menus
Surface
1-33
Pan map
5-134, 5-142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
I-3
INDEX
RX indication
Ryan 9900BX TAS
4-17
6-33
S
Scheduler
Secure Digital (SD) card
Selected Altitude
5-103
1-7, 1-35, B-1
2-2, 2-8, 2-23,
7-7, 7-9, 7-23
Selected Course
2-3, 2-11
Selected Heading
2-3, 2-11,
7-16, 7-23,
7-27, 7-28
Sequencing, automatic waypoint D-3
8-1
Service class, XM
Servos
1-4, 7-19
Severe thunderstorm
6-19
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
6-9, 6-17
Slip/Skid Indicator
2-2, 2-7
Softkeys
Annunciations
2-21
EIS
1-20, 3-1, 3-4,
3-6, 3-8
MFD
1-20
PFD
1-17–1-19,
2-2
4-35, 4-38–4Transponder
40
XM Radio
8-3
4-7
Speaker
1-8
Splash screen, power-up
Squelch
4-1
COM
4-21
ICS
4-10–4-11
MASQ
4-8, 4-10
Standby frequency
4-14, 4-16,
4-18–4-19,
4-25, 4-26,
4-29, 4-31,
4-33, 4-34
Stormscope
5-123, 6-2,
6-4
Stormscope Page
6-6
Storm cells
6-16
6-2
Strike data
Strike location
6-16
6-9
Surface analysis, weather
Surface winds
6-17
SUSP annunciation, HSI
2-13
Symbols, map
G-1
System annunciations
1-12
1-8
System power-up
I-4
System Setup Page
System Status Page
System time
Format
Offset
1-26–1-32
1-34, 8-6
2-2, 2-18
1-28
1-28
T
Tachometer (RPM)
3-2, 3-4
6-21
TAF
TCAS symbology
6-25
Temporary Flight Restrictions 6-9
Terrain
6-36
Color indications
G-3
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
6-42, 6-43,
6-44, 6-45,
6-47, 6-50,
6-51, 6-52,
A-12, A-13
6-47, 6-50
Pop-up alerts
Status annunciations
2-22, 6-52
System test
6-45
Terrain database
B-2
5-120–5-121
Terrain map data
6-9
Textual weather data
1-28
Time, system
Timer
Departure
5-102
Flight
5-102
Generic
2-19, 5101–5-102
Timer/References Window
2-19
Topographic information
5-119–5-120,
5-136, 5-142,
6-35
5-117
Track vector
Traffic Advisories
6-25, 6-30
Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) 6-33
2-3, 2-22
Traffic Annunciation
Traffic Information Service (TIS) 6-32, 4-37,
F-1–F-2
Voice alerts
2-22
Traffic map data
5-126–5-127
6-29–6-30,
Traffic Map Page
6-44
1-3, 4-35–4Transponder
40
Transponder code, entering
4-39
2-2, 4-35
Transponder Status Box
Trend Vector
Airspeed
2-4
Altitude
Turn Rate
Trim
Trim adapter
Trip planning
2-7
2-11
3-2, 3-4
7-19
5-97–5-101,
6-9
Reset statistics
5-103
2-2, 2-4
True airspeed
Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT °F)3-2, 3-4, 3-10
6-17
Turbulence
Turn anticipation
D-3
Turn Rate Indicator
2-2, 2-11
2-11
Turn Rate Trend Vector
TX indication
4-17
U
Unlighted obstacle
Update rate, weather product
Utilities
6-44
6-10
5-100–5-102
V
Vector-To-Final
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)
Vertical Speed Reference
VFR code
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic
Voltmeter
Volume
COM audio
ICS
Music
NAV radio
Speaker
XM Radio
VOR
Frequency
Information
Nearest
Recent
Selection
VOR Information Page
Vspeed references
5-46
2-3, 2-9
5-110–5-111
2-2, 2-9
7-10, 7-23
7-10, 7-23
4-40
2-22, A-2
3-4
8-5
4-6, 4-18
4-10–4-11
4-11
4-18
4-7
8-3
4-31, 5-86
4-29, 5-73–574
5-85–5-86
5-74
4-14, 4-24
4-29
2-5, 2-19
W
Warning, altitude
WARN annunciation, HSI
Warranty
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
4-2
2-12
i
190-00552-00 Rev. A
INDEX
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing
Skipping
Waypoint, user
Comment
Information
Nearest
Recent
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Weather avoidance
Weather Data Link Page
D-2, D-3
D-3
5-78
5-75–5-80
5-87
5-77
1-23, 6-21
6-2
6-9, 6-13,
6-14, 6-18
6-4
Weather Group options
Weather information
5-123–5-124
6-9
Weather Information Page
Weather Legends Window
6-18
Weather Products
8-1
Wind shear
6-17
Wind vector
5-118
Wings level
7-6, 7-13, 715, 7-18, 7-25
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar
6-24
4-32
WX Frequency
WX frequency loading
4-32
X
XM Information Page
XM Lightning
XM Radio Page
XM Satellite Radio
XM Satellite Weather
XPDR
8-2
6-9
8-3
1-4, 6-9, 8-1
5-124, 6-9,
6-11
4-35–4-40
Z
Zoom
Auto
Range
190-00552-00 Rev. A
5-116
5-142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Columbia 350/400
I-5
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising